Spreadsheet: 4961ccb0-09b0-400d-9d79-55baa45f3f09
Sheet: Sheet1

qty. | isbn | cluster | authoreditor1_lastname | authoreditors_affiliation | title | subtitle | series_title | volume_number | edition_number | copyright_year | number_of_arabic_pages | term_cover_type | term_medium | bibliographic_information | springer_reference | price_usd_status | price_usd | term_main_discipline | [NAME] | subject1 | bic_code1 | term_subject2 | subject2 | bic_code2 | term_bookstore | term_product_category | term_publisher_name | delivery_status_ny | pub_date_planned | pub_date_actual_1st_rel_ny | distribution_information | table_of_contents_short | info_text | usp_editorial | term_publication_class | discount_group_ny | ebook_info_no_e_rights | ebook_package | term_ebook_package
 | 978-94-017-8621-8 | Education | Abramovich | [NAME], State University of New York at Potsdam, Potsdam, NY, USA | Computational experiment approach to advanced secondary mathematics curriculum |  | Mathematics Education in the Digital Era | 3 | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 250 p. 252 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Education | Mathematics Education | SCO25000 | JNU | Computational Mathematics and Numerical Analysis | SCM1400X | PBKS | Education | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-02-09 00:00:00 |  | worldwide | ​ Chapter 1. Geometric techniques in solving equations and inequalities in one variable.- Section 1.1. Solving equations as a combination of experiment and theory.- Section 1.2. Solving inequalities in one variable using computer graphing.- Chapter 2. Exploring quadratic functions depending on parameters.- Section 2.1. Quadratic functions and their properties.- Section 2.3.  Finding extreme values of functions through geometrization.- Section 2.4. Location of the roots of a quadratic equation on the number line.- Section 2.5. Mutual location of the roots of two quadratic equations on the number line.- Chapter 3. Equations with parameters.- Section 3.1. Equations containing absolute values of variables and parameters.- Section 3.2. Equations containing radicals.- Section 3.3. Transcendental equations.- Section 3.4. Simultaneous equations.- Chapter 4. Inequalities with parameters.- Section 4.1. Method of locus construction.- Section 4.2. Two-dimensional sign-chart method.- Section 4.3. More on the location of roots of quadratic equations on the number line.- Chapter 5. Geometric inquiry into the equation .-Section 5.1. Introduction.- Section 5.2. Solving equations and inequalities that comprise the sum.- Section 5.3. Sign diagrams and partitioning of the plane of parameters.- Chapter 6. Geometric probability.- Section 6.1. Linear functions with random parameters.- Section 6.2. Quadratic equations with random parameters.- Section 6.3. Trigonometric equations with two random coefficients. | This book promotes the experimental mathematics approach in the context of secondary mathematics curriculum by exploring mathematical models depending on parameters that were typically considered advanced in the pre-digital education era. This approach, by drawing on the power of computers to perform numerical computations and graphical constructions, stimulates formal learning of mathematics through making sense of a computational experiment. It allows one (in the spirit of [NAME]) to bridge serious mathematical content and contemporary teaching practice. In other words, the notion of teaching experiment can be extended to include a true mathematical experiment. When used appropriately, the approach creates conditions for collateral learning (in the spirit of Dewey) to occur including the development of skills important for engineering applications of mathematics. In the context of a mathematics teacher education program, the book addresses a call for the preparation of teachers capable of utilizing modern technology tools for the modeling-based teaching of mathematics with a focus on methods conducive to the improvement of the whole STEM education at the secondary level. By the same token, using the book’s pedagogy and its mathematical content in a pre-college classroom can assist teachers in introducing students to the ideas that develop the foundation of engineering profession. | <p>Extents the notion of experimental mathematics to include pre-college curriculum</p><p>Introduces a pedagogy of computer experimentation with mathematical models depending on parameters</p><p>Provides teacher candidates with research-like experience in mathematics and its pedagogy</p><p>Presents modeling activities in both technology-enabled and technology-immune approach</p><p>Presents original examples of experimental mathematics pedagogy</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11649 | Mathematics and Statistics
 | 978-3-319-02823-1 | Education | Andere M. | Eduardo Andere M., Steinhardt School of Culture, Education, and Human Development, New York University, New York, NY, USA | Teachers' Perspectives on Finnish School Education | Creating Learning Environments |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 322 | Hard cover | Book | XIX, 322 p. 139 illus. | 0 | final | 54.99 | Education | Sociology of Education | SCO29000 | JN | Teaching and Teacher Education | SCO31000 | JNMT | Education | Brief | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Dedication.- Preface.- Prologue.- Introduction.- Finland's success.- Teachers.- Does Finland evaluate school education?.- Lives and thoughts of teachers and principals I.- Lives and thoughts of teachers and principals II.- Finland’s teaching and learning environment. | This superbly researched study offers a chalk-face perspective on the secret of Finland’s educational success. Providing an intimate and revealing portrait of the Nordic nation’s schools and its teacher training system, it sets out to explain why Finland’s students consistently rank top, with low variance and moderate inputs, among OECD countries across the range of criteria, from reading to mathematics. Alongside the detailed analysis culled from many hours of interviews with teachers and principals and dozens of visits to school throughout the country, the author maps the educational landscape of Finland: the sector’s history, culture and development, its guiding principles, methodologies, and learning environments. The result is a cogent assessment of how and why Finland is universally regarded as a high-grade educational exemplar. The volume provides the hundreds of researchers, teaching professionals, and policy makers who visit Finland in search of inspiration with essential background material on the country’s magic educational ingredients, which include a highly motivated cohort of well-trained teachers, a recognition of the vital importance of early years education and nurture, functional and inviting learning environments, and a rejection of pedagogical dogma in favour of developing methodologies that produce results at the same time as fostering students’ confidence and collegiality. At the same age, Finland’s schoolchildren have roughly one less year of formal schooling than most of their international counterparts, do not consider themselves to be overworked, and rank alongside hot-housed Singaporean or South Korean youngsters in international assessments of achievement. They are the educational equivalent of world-beating sports stars who make success appear effortless. This volume lifts the lid on the hard work and careful planning that underpin their achievements. | <p>Provides a thorough analysis of the Finnish education system and its cultural context not only on national level but par excellence on local, school and classroom level</p><p>Privileges the narratives of teachers and principals and shows the material within the framework of the Finnish success education literature</p><p>Develops the idea that Finland is a learning environment</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7855-9 | Education | Blackledge | Adrian Blackledge, University of Birmingham, Edgbaston, Birmingham, UK; [NAME], University of Birmingham, Edgbaston, Birmingham, UK | Heteroglossia as Practice and Pedagogy |  | Educational Linguistics | 20 | 1 | 2014 | 199 | Hard cover | Book | I, 199 p. 22 illus., 7 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Education | Language Education | SCO23000 | CJ | Applied Linguistics | SCN13000 | CB | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- 1. [NAME] as Practice and Pedagogy.- 2. Building on Heteroglossia and Heterogeneity: The Experience of a Multilingual Classroom.- 3. [NAME], Voicing and Social Categorisation.- 4. [NAME] in Action: Sámi Children, Textbooks and rap .- 5. ‘The Lord is my shock absorber’: A socio-historical integrationist approach to mid-20th century literacy practices in Ghana.- 6. Translanguaging in the Multilingual Montreal Hip Hop Community: Everyday Poetics as Counter to the Myths of the Monolingual Classroom.- 7. [NAME] as Practice, Pleasure, and Pedagogy: Translanguaging in the Lyrical Poetics of “24 Herbs” in Hong Kong.- 8. Learning a Supervernacular: Textspeak in a South African Township.- 9. The Ambiguous World of Heteroglossic Computer-Mediated Language Learning.- 10. [NAME] in the Online Publishing Process: Complexities in Digital and Geographical Borderlands.- 11. Theorizing and Enacting Translanguaging for Social Justice.- 12. Rethinking Bilingual Pedagogy in Alsace: [NAME] and Translanguaging.- 13. Focus on Multilingualism as an Approach in Educational Contexts.- 14. Faux Spanish in the New Latino [NAME] 15. Dissecting Heteroglossia: Interaction Ritual or Performance in Crossing and Stylisation? .- 16. Marking Communicative Repertoire through Metacommentary. | This volume presents evidence about how we understand communication in changing times, and proposes that such understandings may contribute to the development of pedagogy for teaching and learning. It expands current debates on multilingualism, asking which signs are in use and in action, and what are their social, political, and historical implications. The volume’s starting-point is Bakhtin’s ‘heteroglossia’, a key concept in understanding the tensions, conflicts, and multiple voices within, among, and between those signs. The chapters provide illuminating accounts of language practices as they bring into play, both in practice and in pedagogy, voices which index students’ localities, social histories, circumstances, and identities. The book documents the performance of linguistic repertoires in an era of profound social change caused by the shifting nature of nation-states, increased movement of people across territories, and growing digital communication. “Our thinking on language and multilingualism is expanding rapidly. Up until recently we have tended to regard languages as bounded entities, and multilingualism has been understood as knowing more than one language. Working with the concept of heteroglossia, researchers are developing alternative perspectives that treat languages as sets of resources for expressing meaning that can be drawn on by speakers in communicatively productive ways in different contexts. These perspectives raise fundamental questions about the myriad of ways of knowing and using language(s). This collection brings together the contributions of many of the key researchers in the field. It will provide an authoritative reference point for contemporary interpretations of ‘heteroglossia’ and valuable accounts of how ‘translanguaging’ can be explored and exploited in the fields of education and cultural studies.” Professor [NAME], King’s College London, UK.'From rap and hip hop to taxi cabs, and from classrooms to interactive online learning environments, each of the chapters in this volume written by well-known and up-and-coming scholars provide fascinating accounts drawing on a wide diversity of rich descriptive data collected in heteroglossic contexts around the globe. Creese and Blackledge have brought together a compelling collection that builds upon and expands Bakhtin’s construct of heteroglossia. These scholars help to move the field away from the view of languages as separate bounded system by providing detailed examples and expert analyses of the ways bilinguals and multilinguals draw upon their linguistic repertoires for effective and meaningful communication.' [NAME], University of Texas at San Antonio, USA. | <p>Offers new theoretical interpretations and explanations of heteroglossia and shows its relevance to multilingual research and teaching</p><p>Describes debates and analytical approaches in the study of multilingual repertories</p><p>Connects accounts of linguistic practices in multilingual settings to the historical and social relationships which have shaped them</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02486-8 | Education | Bleakley | [NAME], Plymouth University Peninsula School of Medicine, Cornwall, UK | Patient-Centered Medicine in Transition | The Heart of the Matter | Advances in Medical Education | 3 | 1 | 2014 | 502 | Hard cover | Book | XXX, 502 p. 4 illus., 1 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 179 | Education | Medical Education | SCO26000 | JNU |  |  |  | Education | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | -Foreword.- Introduction.- Communication hypocompetence--an  iatrogenic epidemic.- Democracy in medicine.- Patient-centeredness without a center.- How doctors think can be judged from how they listen and speak.- A new wave of patient-centeredness.- Models of patient-centered care.- What is meant by ‘empathy’?.- Gender matters in medical education.- Working and learning in ‘teams’ in a new era of health care.- Theorizing team process through cultural-historical activity theory (CHAT): networking and knotworking.- Theorizing team process through a Foucauldian perspective: gaining a voice in team activity at the clinical coalface.- Theorizing team process through actor-network-theory (ANT): communication practice as a theory in action.- Theorizing team process through Deleuzean rhizomatics: becoming a medical professional in nomadic teams.- Team process and complexity theory: blunting Occam’s Razor.- Building a collaborative community in medical education research.- Conclusion: professing medical identities in the liquid world of teams.​- Bibliography.- Index | This book challenges functional models for more aesthetic and ethical models, where communication is grounded in values systems of cultures. Here, communication is treated as a distributed phenomenon involving networks of persons, activities and artifacts, and extends beyond doctor-patient relationships to working in and across teams around patients. The purpose of the book is to stimulate thinking about how patient care and safety may be improved through a focus upon the ‘non-technical’ work of doctors – interpersonal communication, teamwork and situation awareness in teams. The focus is then not on the personality of the doctor, but on the dynamics of relationships which form doctors’ multiple identities. | <p>Challenges all previous models of communication between patients and doctors </p><p>Explains how the non-technical focus of communication can improve patient outcomes and increase patient safety </p><p>Focuses on the dynamics of the doctor/patient relationship</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11650 | Medicine
 | 978-94-007-7852-8 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME], Salem State University, Salem, MA, USA | World Class Initiatives and Practices in Early Education | Moving Forward in a Global Age | Educating the Young Child | 9 | 1 | 2014 | 193 | Hard cover | Book | VIII, 193 p. 10 illus., 6 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Education | Childhood Education | SCO37000 | [NAME] | International and Comparative Education | SCO13000 | JN | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  | worldwide | Part I: Antecedents and Present Developments in Universal Preschool Education.- 1. The Evolution of Universal Preschool Education in a Global Age; [NAME] Swiniarski.- 2. Climbing the Mountain: The Journey to Quality Pre-Kindergarten in Tennessee; Rebecca Isbell.- 3. Florida’s Voluntary Universal Prekindergarten: A Citizen’s Initiative Taking Baby Steps; [NAME] and [NAME] II: Curriculum Initiatives for Early Childhood Programs in a Global Age.- 4. Opening Doors in Northern Chile: The International School of Arica; Michelle Pierce.- 5. Girls in the Primary Science Classrooms of Wales: Theorizing Beyond Dominant Discourses of Gender; Cletus Cervoni.- 6. Let’s Get Talking: Promoting Communication, Language and Literacy for Young Children in Multicultural England; Avril Brock.- 7. China’s Educational Reform and its Impact on Early Childhood Curriculum; [NAME] and [NAME]:  Beyond the Walls of the School and Center.- 8. Rhyme Times Treasure Baskets and Books: How Early Years Libraries Can Help to Deliver the Best Start; [NAME] Rankin.- 9. The Politics of Play in England: An Appeal to Parliament; [NAME]. Cross-sector Partnerships for Early Education and Care; [NAME] Breitborde.- 11. The Science Art and Writing (SAW) Initiative; Jenni Rant.- [NAME]. | This book offers current international initiatives, developed for working with children from “Birth to Eight” by a diverse group of noted professional authors. Their readings present an overview of early education as it evolved from the Froebelian kindergarten to today’s practices in various Early Education settings around the globe. The international voices of the authors represent a balanced perspective of happenings in various nations and lend a conversational approach to each chapter. The chapters analyze the Universal Preschool Education movement promoted by various countries, states, and agencies; examine model curriculum programs in a variety of teaching/learning settings; and identify directions the community can take in promoting effective early education programs. Particular attention is given to key issues and concerns faced by practitioners and families world-wide. Studies reveal successful approaches to bilingual education in a Chilean kindergarten, research findings on gender differences in primary school girls for learning science in Wales, literacy development strategies for teaching in UK multicultural classrooms and childhood centres, the process of integration special education with early childhood practices in China, and exemplars of community outreach to improve the well being of children through advocacy for governmental changes in early education policies and professional development. This book is for everyone interested in the well being of young children moving forward in a global age to meet the challenges of early citizenship in their world. | <p>Gives a global perspective of early education practices for children living in the global village</p><p>Offers practical and tested international models, case studies and approaches to consider for adaptation</p><p>Guides parents, teachers, community leaders on meeting educational, cultural, and social needs of young children as citizens of the world</p><p>Identifies resources and how to implement them to meet diverse needs in early childhood settings</p><p>Combines theory and practice with a research base which is current</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7280-9 | Education | Bruguière | [NAME], EA 4148 S2HEP, University of Lyon 1, ENS-Lyon, University of Lyon, [NAME], France; [NAME], UMR ICAR, CNRS, University of Lyon 2, ENS-Lyon, [NAME] 07, France; [NAME], EA 4148 S2HEP, University of Lyon 1, ENS-Lyon, University of Lyon, [NAME], France | Topics and Trends in Current Science Education | 9th ESERA Conference Selected Contributions | Contributions from Science Education Research | 1 | 1 | 2014 | 601 | Hard cover | Book | X, 601 p. 102 illus., 57 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 179 | Education | Science Education | SCO27000 | JNU |  |  |  | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | Available | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 | 2013-11-19 00:00:00 |  | Part 1: Overview of the book.- Overview of the book,    [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Clément.- Part 2: Socio-Scientific Issues.- The Need for a Public Understanding of Sciences, Isabelle Stengers.- Questions Socialement Vives and Socio-Scientific Issues: New Trends of Research to Meet the Training Needs of Post-Modern Society, Laurence Simonneaux.- Teachers’ Beliefs, Classroom Practices and Professional Development towards Socio-Scientific Issues, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Sperling.- Which perspectives are referred in students’ arguments about a [NAME]-scientific Issue? The case of Bears’ reintroduction in the Pyrenees, [NAME] and [NAME] Márquez.- Learning about the role and function of science in public debate as an essential component of scientific literacy, [NAME], Jan A. Nielsen, Avi Hofstein.- Exploring Secondary Students’ Arguments in the Context of Socio-scientific Issues, Dr. [NAME], Dr. [NAME], and Dr. [NAME] on Science-Technology-Society (STS) and Nature of Science (NOS): Strengths, Weaknesses, and Teaching Practice, [NAME]–[NAME]; María-Antonia Manassero–Mas; [NAME]–Carmona and [NAME] Part 3: Teachers’ Practices and Teachers Professional Development.- Professional Learning of Science Teachers, Jan H. Van Driel.-  Nanoeducation: Zooming into Teacher Professional Development Programs in Nanoscience and Technology, [NAME], [NAME], Sevil Akaygun, and Virginie Albe.- Education for Sustainable Development: An International Survey on Teachers’ Conceptions, Pierre Clément and Silvia Caravita.- Learning to Teach Science as Inquiry: Developing an Evidence-based Framework for Effective Teacher Professional Development, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] , [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] in a Teaching Sequence Using ICT: A Case Study in Optics at Lower Secondary School, Suzane [NAME], Christian Buty.- Inquiry based mathematics and science education across Europe: A synopsis of various approaches and their potentials, [NAME], Silke Mikelskis-Seifert, Manfred Euler.- Measuring Chemistry Teachers’ Content Knowledge – Is it correlated to Pedagogical [NAME]? [NAME] and [NAME] Dollny.- PART 4: The students - Multiple Perspectives.- Boys in Physics Lessons: Focus on Masculinity in an Analysis of Learning Opportunities, [NAME], [NAME] Which Effective Competencies Do Students Use in PISA Assessment of Scientific Literacy? [NAME], Pascale Montpied, Andrée Tiberghien.- Development of Understanding in Chemistry, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], Jennifer Claesgens.- Learning Affordances: Understanding Visitors’ Learning in Science Museum Environment, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Kim.- Modelling and Assessing Experimental Competencies in Physics, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], Patrik Vogt.- Understanding Students’ Conceptions of Electromagnetic Induction: A Semiotic Analysis, [NAME] Part 5 Relationships between Teaching and Learning.- Analysing Classroom Activities: Theoretical and Methodological Considerations, [NAME] The Impact of a Context-led Curriculum on Different Students’ Experiences of School Science, Indira Banner & Jim Ryder.- Students’ Experienced Coherence between Chemistry and Biology in Context-Based Secondary Science Education, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME]. Boersma.- The Relationship between | This book features 35 of best papers from the 9th European Science Education Research Association Conference, ESERA 2011, held in Lyon, France, September 5th-9th 2011. The ESERA international conference featured some 1,200 participants from Africa, Asia, Australia, Europe as well as North and South America offering insight into the field at the end of the first decade of the 21st century. This book presents studies that represent the current orientations of research in science education and includes studies in different educational traditions from around the world. It is organized into six parts around the three poles (content, students, teachers) and their interrelations of science education: after a general presentation of the volume (first part), the second part concerns SSI (Socio-Scientific Issues) dealing with new types of content, the third the teachers, the fourth the students, the fifth the relationships between teaching and learning, and the sixth the teaching resources and the curricula. | <p>Gathers short accessible articles by opinion leaders in the world of science education<br>Bringing together cutting edge research, this book is indispensable to those who want to stay up to date with developments in the field<br>Offers new horizons and prospects for research, so will serve as a guide for orienting future research​</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03082-1 | Education |  | [NAME], KU Leuven [NAME], [NAME], Belgium; [NAME], [NAME], Leuven, Belgium | Educational Research: Material Culture and Its Representation |  | Educational Research | 8 | 1 | 2013 | 219 | Hard cover | Book | XI, 219 p. 18 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Education | Educational Philosophy | SCO38000 | JNA | Methodology of the Social Sciences | SCX17000 | JHBC | Education | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. On the tangible material culture of child-rearing, education, and educational research.- Paul Smeyers & Marc Depaepe.- 2. Valorising the cultural heritage of the school desk through historical research; [NAME], [NAME] Verstraete.- 3. Mirrors of reality? Material culture and the significance of images for research into long-term educational processes; [NAME] Dekker.- 4. Visual, literary and numerical perspectives on education: materiality, presence and interpretation; Karin Priem.- 5. Education and the ‘new totalitarianism’: How standards for reporting on empirical studies of education limit the scope of academic research and communication; Sophie Ward.- 6. Materials that shape researchers; Naomi Hodgson.- 7. The Tractarian template in the representation of educational research: Can we ever depart from the picture of logical empiricism?; [NAME] Smeyers.- 8. The ethics of materiality: Some insights from non-representational theory for educational research; [NAME] Fendler.- 9. Mud and hair: an essay on the conditions of educational research; [NAME]. Material and aesthetic tensions within arts-based educational research: Drawing woodpaths; [NAME] Munday.- 11. Olympification versus aesthetization: The appeal of mathematics outside the classroom; [NAME], Karen François & Jean Paul Van Bendegem.- 12. Signs of the times: Iconography of a new education; [NAME] Standish.- 13. The paradigmatic differences between name/date and footnote styles of citation; Nick Burbules.- 14. Conversation – in the construction and representation of research; [NAME] 15. About the Authors.- Author Index – Subject Index. | This collection discusses and illustrates how educational research is affected by the economic, institutional and physical contingencies of its time, and in our time even increasingly is driven by them. It is argued that the antidote to this is, however, not to aspire to ‘thought itself’, but instead to do justice to its own rootedness in the ‘material’, including textuality. From an historical point of view such an innovative approach can itself revamp the material scholarly culture and the way it is represented. The chapters address a variety of topics such as the cultural heritage of the school desk, the significance of images for research into long-term educational processes, the way iconic signs function, and how modes of enquiry relate to the materiality of education. Attention is also given to standards for reporting on educational research studies and how these limit the scope and communication and moreover shape researchers, to the forms of citation practices as substantially influencing methods and content, and to the centrality of conversation not just as the means to an end but as what matters; further to representational and to non-representational theories for educational research. Some examples are drawn from the area of arts-based educational research, from mathematics education, and from the discourse on universities. | <p>Challenges prevailing ideas about the ‘application’ of philosophy and history of education </p><p>Demonstrates in a unique way how philosophical and historical approaches are relevant for the practice and theory of education and for educational research </p><p>Takes the debate of the historical and philosophical complexities and constraints of the discourse of educational research in the context of material culture and its representation a step further</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-4365-6 | Education | Devetak | [NAME], University of Ljubljana, Ljubljana, Slovenia; [NAME], University of Ljubljana, Ljubljana, Slovenia | Learning with Understanding in the Chemistry Classroom |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 412 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 412 p. 129 illus., 7 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Education | Science Education | SCO27000 | JNU | Learning & Instruction | SCO22000 | JNT | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Section I TEACHING AND LEARNING CHEMISTRY.- Part I UNDERSTANDING CHEMISTRY CONCEPTS.- Constructing active learning in chemistry: concepts, cognition and conceptions, [NAME] Taber.- The development of theoretical frameworks for understanding the learning of chemistry, [NAME] Chittleborough.- Linking the Macro with the Submicro Levels of Chemistry: The Role of Active Learning by Means of Demonstrations and Experiments, Georgios Tsaparlis.- Teaching Chemistry Conceptually, [NAME] Debugging Myths about Teaching and Learning Chemistry, [NAME] STUDENTS' CHARACTERISTICS AND CHEMISTRY LEARNING.- The Role of working memory in making the Learning of Chemistry Accessible and Enjoyable, Norman Reid.- Active Learning Educational Strategies Based on the Differences Between Groups of 16-year-old Students Regarding their Gender and Academic Achievements in Chemistry, [NAME] and [NAME] Section II APPROACHES IN CHEMISTRY TEACHING FOR LEARNING WITH UNDERSTANDING.- Part I COOPERATIVE AND COLLABORATIVE LEARNING.- Twenty-five Years of Experience with Cooperative Learning in Chemistry, [NAME] and [NAME] [NAME] through Cooperative Learning in the Chemistry Classroom, [NAME] Cardellini.- The learning company approach to promote active learning in secondary chemistry lessons, [NAME], [NAME], Bettina Most, [NAME] and Ingo Eilks.- Contexts as learning catalysts for students and teachers – approaches and exemplary results from the projects Chemie im [NAME] and CHEMOL, [NAME], [NAME] and Wiebke Endres.- Part II TEACHING STRATEGIES.- Using Worksheets with Different Levels of Guidance to Engage Students in Dynamic Simulations, Sevil Akaygün and [NAME] of the Predict-Observe-Explain instructional strategy to enhance students’ understanding of redox reactions, [NAME], [NAME] and A L Chandrasegaran.- Application of Case Study and Role-playing in Forensic Chemistry Education, Iwona Maciejowska, [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Kościelniak.- Students' motivation levels for learning chemistry and their success on design and construct activity, [NAME] and [NAME] Juriševič.- Section III CURRICULUM REFORM AND TEACHERS.- Fostering Active Chemistry Learning in Thailand: Towards a Learner-Centred Student Experience, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Charmain.- [NAME] in Computerized Chemical Education Environments, Yehudit [NAME] and [NAME] Barak.- Pre-service Chemistry Teachers` Use of Active Learning During their Practical Pedagogical Training, Vesna [NAME] and [NAME]. | This volume offers a critical examination of a variety of conceptual approaches to teaching and learning chemistry in the school classroom. Presenting up-to-date research and theory and featuring contributions by respected academics on several continents, it explores ways of making knowledge meaningful and relevant to students as well as strategies for effectively communicating the core concepts essential for developing a robust understanding of the subject.Structured in three sections, the contents deal first with teaching and learning chemistry, discussing general issues and pedagogical strategies using macro, sub-micro and symbolic representations of chemical concepts. Researchers also describe new and productive teaching strategies. The second section examines specific approaches that foster learning with understanding, focusing on techniques such as cooperative learning, presentations, laboratory activities, multimedia simulations and role-playing in forensic chemistry classes. The final part of the book details learner-centered active chemistry learning methods, active computer-aided learning and trainee chemistry teachers` use of student-centered learning during their pre-service education. Comprehensive and highly relevant, this new publication makes a significant contribution to the continuing task of making chemistry classes engaging and effective. | <p>Shows importance of active learning for the successful teaching and learning of chemistry </p><p>Suggests teaching approaches developed based on research data</p><p>Covers all levels of chemistry education from elementary school to university</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7986-0 | Education | Ferrari | [NAME], University of Toronto OISE, Toronto, ON, Canada; [NAME], University of Toronto OISE, Toronto, ON, Canada | The Scientific Study of Personal Wisdom | From Contemplative Traditions to Neuroscience |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 351 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 351 p. 14 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Education | Educational Psychology | SCO39000 | JNC | Philosophy of Education | SCE25000 | JNA | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface, Michel Ferrari & Nic M. Weststrate.- Part I: Person-based Wisdom.- Chapter 1. The Need to Distinguish Personal from General [NAME]: A Short History and Empirical Evidence, [NAME] 2. Relevance, Meaning and the Cognitive Science of Wisdom, [NAME] Ferraro.- Chapter 3. Personal Wisdom in the Balance, [NAME] 4. The MORE Life Experience Model: A Theory of the Development of Wisdom, Judith Glück & Susan Bluck.- Chapter 5. Neurobiological Basis of Personal Wisdom, Jeff D. Sanders & [NAME] II: Wisdom in everyday, real-life contexts.- Chapter 6. From Persons to Positive Influences: Exploring Wisdom in Real-life [NAME], [NAME] Yang.- Chapter 7. Stories of Wisdom to Live By: Developing Wisdom in a Narrative Mode, [NAME], [NAME], & Anda Petro.- Chapter 8. Religion, Spirituality, and Personal Wisdom: A Tale of Two Types, Paul Wink & Michele Dillon.- Chapter 9. Social Interpretation of Wisdom, Ricca Edmondson.- Part III: Self-transcendent wisdom.- Chapter 10. The Transpersonal in Personal Wisdom, [NAME] Chapter 11. The [NAME] Who Stole Wisdom, Eleanor Rosch.- Chapter 12. Wisdom of the East and West: A Relational Developmental Systems Perspective, [NAME] Takahashi.- Chapter 13. The Paradoxical Nature of Personal Wisdom and its Relationship to Human Development in the Cognitive, Reflective and Affective Domains, [NAME], [NAME]: The transformative potential of wisdom inquiry.- Chapter 14. Wisdom: Object of Study or Basic Aim of Inquiry?, Nicholas Maxwell.- Conclusion, Michel Ferrari & Nic M. Weststrate. | The rich and diverse contributions to this volume span a wide variety of disciplines, from psychology and philosophy to neuroscience, by some of the most influential scholars in the emerging science of personal wisdom. As such, it is a collection of essential readings and the first publication to integrate both the spiritual and pragmatic dimensions of personal wisdom.The content of the book goes beyond speculative theory to present a wealth of scientific research currently under way in this expanding field. It also describes numerous promising methods now being deployed in the quest for scientific knowledge of the elusive, yet critical, phenomenon of personal wisdom. The book is an excellent introduction to the field for novice researchers as well as a stimulating and enlightening resource for established experts. Its broad appeal makes it a vital addition to the libraries of academics and practitioners in many disciplines, from developmental psychology to gerontology and from philosophy to contemplative religious traditions such as Buddhism. | <p>First volume on the scientific study of personal wisdom </p><p>Unique in presenting empirical evidence about how wisdom can be studied as a characteristic of persons </p><p>Contributions from seminal scholars in the emerging field of wisdom studies Integrates spiritual and pragmatic perspectives on wisdom</p><p>Provides a truly interdisciplinary collection with contributions from the areas of psychology, sociology, cognitive science, neuroscience and philosophy</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7965-5 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME], The National University of Malaysia, Bangi, Malaysia | Language Policy Challenges in Multi-Ethnic Malaysia |  | Multilingual Education | 8 | 1 | 2014 | 124 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 124 p. 1 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Education | Educational Policy and Politics | SCO19000 | JNF | Applied Linguistics | SCN13000 | CB | Education | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- Preface.- Acknowledgement.- 1: Introducing the situational context, macro-sociolinguistics and key elements of language planning and policy in Malaysia.- 2: Language, nation-building and identity formation in a multi-ethnic society.- 3: The role of language education during colonial rule and post-independence period.- 4: Drastic change in the medium of instruction: From Bahasa Malaysia to English.- 5: The re-reversal from English to Bahasa Malaysia.- 6: The Impact of the change in medium of instruction in Malaysia on the Chinese community and mother-tongue education.- 7: The revival of a minority language in Malaysia: The dynamics between national linguistic ideology and ethnic linguistic identity.- 8: Conclusion: The road ahead for Malaysia: Balancing ethnic, national and international identities.- References. | Set in Malaysia, this book encompasses language and cultural policy challenges that many other multi-ethnic nations currently have to address. The people of Malaysia constitute a diverse ethnic, linguistic and cultural population and one of the continuing challenges is the development and establishment of the Malaysian people’s ethnic, national and global cultural identities. This challenge is evident in the journey of language and cultural policy from the post-independence period to the 21st century; a period of over 50 years. The book highlights political, socio-cultural, economic and knowledge economy factors as they impact on decisions made by the government with regard to language policy in the various educational systems. It examines decisions made on the selection of the national language, the medium of instruction in educational systems, the varying changes in language policy for the field of science and technology and the maintenance and sustenance of minority languages. | <p>Deals with language policy, educational policy and nation building in multi-ethnic societies, framed by practical experience in one of Asia’s most ethnically diverse countries, Malaysia </p><p>Highlights political, socio-cultural, economic and knowledge economy factors and their impact on government decisions with regards to language policies and education</p><p>Examines the dynamic tension between national collective identity and ethnic identity in majority and minority ethnic groups</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7792-7 | Education | Henriksen | [NAME], University of Oslo, Oslo, Norway; Justin Dillon, King's College London, London, UK; [NAME], Leeds University, Leeds University, UK, UK | Understanding Student Participation and Choice in Science and Technology Education |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 250 p. 55 illus. | 0 | approx. | 139 | Education | Science Education | SCO27000 | JNU | Mathematics Education | SCO25000 | JNU | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | Planned | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  |  | This book offers different perspectives on the participation of young people (notably women) in science, technology, engineering and mathematics (STEM) education. It presents relevant theoretical frameworks from sociology, social psychology and gender studies; reviews of relevant research within science education, and empirical findings concerning young people’s educational choices in various STEM disciplines in 5 European countries. The empirical results have been generated within the EU-supported project IRIS (Interests & Recruitment In Science) and include quantitative and qualitative analyses. The book aims to contribute to developing theoretical frameworks, extending the empirical knowledge base, and giving policy-relevant guidelines concerning how participation and gender balance in the STEM disciplines may be improved. Most chapters are written by IRIS project members, with some additional invited contributors. | <p>Offers new insights into what determines how students' interest in science and scientific careers evolves </p><p>Describes specific strategies for the improvement of recruitment and retention in STEM Higher Education </p><p>Provides tools for helping students to make a meaningful educational choice</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02867-5 | Education | Horsley | [NAME], Central Queensland University, [NAME], QLD, Australia; [NAME], Central Queensland University, [NAME], QLD, Australia; [NAME], Central Queensland University, [NAME], QLD, Australia; [NAME], National University of Ireland, Maynooth, Ireland | Current Trends in Eye Tracking Research |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 414 | Hard cover | Book | I, 414 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Education | Learning & Instruction | SCO22000 | JNT | Cognitive Psychology | SCY20060 | JMR | Education | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Section I: Eye Tracking and the Visual System.- The Active Eye: Perspectives on Eye Movement Research, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] from Lab to Life, [NAME] of Attention by Feature Relationships: The End of the Road for Feature Map Theories? [NAME] Gaze And Speech: Pointing Device and Text Entry Modality, T.R. Beelders and P.J. Blignaut.- Improving the Accuracy of Video-Based Eye-Tracking in Real-Time through Post-Calibration Regression, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] .- Gaze Shifts and Pen Velocity Minima during Line Copying with Consideration to Signature Simulation, [NAME] and Jodi Sita.- Degree of Subject's Indecisiveness Characterized by Eye Movement Patterns in Increasingly Difficult Tasks, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME]. The Use of an Infrared Eye Tracker in Evaluating the Reading Performance in a Congenital Nystagmus Patient Fitted with Soft Contact Lens: A Case Report, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and N. Mennie.- Section II: Aligning Eye Tracking and EEG Data.- Triangulating the Reading Brain: Eye Movements, Computational Models, and EEG, [NAME], Brain Potentials, and Timelines of Word Recognition during Natural Reading, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Sommer.- Measuring Neuronal Correlates of Reading with Novel Spread-Spectrum Protocols, [NAME] The Quest for Integrating Data in Mixed Research: User Experience Research Revisited, Annika Wiklund-Engblom and Joachim Högväg.- Section III: Eye Tracking and Marketing and Social Applications.- Eye Tracking as a Research Method in Social and Marketing Applications, Mike Horsley.- Mobile Eye-Tracking in Retail Research, Dr [NAME], Martin Jones.- Private and Public: Eye Tracking Applications in Private and Academic Sector Marketing Research, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Forgeries: inSights to Forensic Expert Evidence, [NAME], B. Found, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] A Role for Eye Tracking Research in Accounting and Financial Reporting? [NAME] and [NAME] Tracking during a Psychosocial Stress Simulation: Insights into Social Anxiety Disorder, [NAME] Chen.- Using Saccadic Eye Movements to Assess Cognitive Decline with Ageing, Alison Bowling and Anja Draper.- Comparing Personally-Tailored Video- and Text-Delivered Web-Based Physical Activity Interventions – The Medium and the Message: An Eye-Tracking Study, Corneel Vandelanotte, Naya Persaud, [NAME], [NAME] Horsley.- Benefits of Complementing Eye Tracking Analysis with Think Aloud Protocol in a Multilingual Country with High Power Distance, Ashok Sivaji and [NAME] Eye Tracking and Education.- Eye Tracking and the Learning System: An Overview, [NAME], [NAME] Eliot.- A New Approach to Cognitive Metrics: Analysing the Visual Mechanics of Comprehension using Eye Tracking Data in Student Completion of High Stakes Testing Evaluation, [NAME] and [NAME] and Expert Nurses in Analysing Electrocardiographs (ECGs) Containing Critical Diagnostic Information: An Eye Tracking Study of the Development of Complex Nursing Visual Cognitive Skills, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], Naya Persaud.- The Development and Refinement of Student Self-Regulatory Strategies in Online Learning Environments, [NAME] and [NAME]. | Our eye movements in response to visual stimuli reveal much about how we experience the world. Focusing on the latest developments in the multidisciplinary field of eye tracking research, this volume ranges across a wide spectrum of research applications, with four sections covering the plethora of practical uses to which our expanding knowledge can be put. They offer abundant evidence that eye tracking research and its methodologies offer new ways of collecting data, framing research questions, and thinking about how we view our world. As a result, we are discovering more about how the visual system works, as well as how it interacts with attention, cognition, and behaviour. Current Trends in Eye Tracking Research presents the work of more than 50 researchers and academics, showcasing groundbreaking studies and innovative ways of applying eye tracking technologies to interesting research problems. The book covers the current output of a number of pioneering research laboratories, detailing their work on eye tracking and the visual system, alignment and EEG data, marketing and social applications, and eye tracking in education. Featuring creative uses of existing technology as well as inventive implementation of new technology in a range of research contexts and disciplines, this new publication is compelling proof of the growing importance of this exciting and fast-moving area of scientific endeavor. | <p>Chronicles the wide applications and uses of eye tracking research </p><p>Presents a range of new and innovative studies using eye tracking research and research methods </p><p>Showcases innovative ways of applying eye tracking technologies to interesting research problems</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | [PHONE]-66-5 | Education | Kemmis | [NAME], Charles Sturt University, [NAME], NSW, Australia; [NAME], Griffith University, Gold Coast, QLD, Australia; [NAME], Victoria University, , BC, Canada | The Action Research Planner | Doing Critical Participatory Action Research |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 200 | Hard cover | Book | XI, 200 p. 6 illus. | 0 | final | 69.99 | Education | Teaching and Teacher Education | SCO31000 | JNMT | Learning & Instruction | SCO22000 | JNT | Education | Graduate/advanced undergraduate textbook | Springer Singapore | Available | 2013-11-30 00:00:00 | 2013-11-12 00:00:00 |  | 1. Introducing critical participatory action research.- 2. A new view of participation: Participation in public spheres.- 3. A new view of practice: Practices held in place by practice [NAME]. A new view of research: Research within practice traditions.- 5. Doing critical participatory action research: The ‘planner’ part.- 6. Examples of critical participatory action research.- 7. Resources for critical participatory action researchers.- Index. | A fully-updated and reworked version of the classic book by [NAME] and [NAME], now joined by [NAME], The Action Research Planner is a detailed guide to developing and conducting a critical participatory action research project. The authors outline new views on ‘participation’ (based on [NAME] notion of a ‘public sphere’), ‘practice’ (as shaped by practice architectures), and ‘research’ (as research within practice traditions). They provide five extended examples of critical participatory action research studies. The book includes a range of resources for people planning a critical participatory research initiative, providing guidance on how to establish an action research group and identify a shared concern, research ethics, principles of procedure for action researchers, protocols for collaborative work, keeping a journal, gathering evidence, reporting, and choosing academic partners. Unlike earlier editions, The Action Research Planner focuses specifically on critical participatory action research, which occupies a particular (critical) niche in the action research 'family'. The Action Research Planner is an essential guide to planning and undertaking this type of research. | <p>A step-by-step guide to planning critical participatory action research projects </p><p>Provides concise and readable illustrative examples</p><p>Provides practical resources to assist new and experienced action researchers planning a study</p><p>Provides a theoretical framework that explains ‘participation’, ‘practice’ and ‘research’</p><p>Fully updated new edition of a classic of Action Research literature</p> | Students | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02561-2 | Education | Leatham | [NAME], Brigham Young University, Provo, UT, USA; [NAME], Western Michigan University, Kalamazoo, MI, USA; [NAME], Western Michigan University, Kalamazoo, MI, USA | Research Trends in Mathematics Teacher Education | Research from the 2012 PME-NA Annual Conference | Research in Mathematics Education | 1 | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 330 p. 40 illus. | 0 | approx. | 179.99 | Education | Mathematics Education | SCO25000 | JNU |  |  |  | Education | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | Planned | 2014-03-17 00:00:00 |  |  | A Processes Approach to Mathematical Knowledge for Teaching: The Case of a Beginning Teacher.- Mathematical Knowledge for Teaching High School Geometry.- Using a Knowledge-in-Pieces Approach to Explore the Illusion of Proportionality in Covariance Situations.- Towards Expert Curriculum Use: Developing a Measure of Pre-Service Teachers' Curricular Knowledge.- Teacher Beliefs/Identity.- Photo-Elicitation/Photovoice Interviews to Study Mathematics Teacher Identity.- Honoring Teachers' Identity: A Journey Towards Non-Evaluative Listening.- Mathematics Teachers Investigating Reasoning and Sense Making in their Teaching.- Teachers' Attributions for Students' Mathematical Work.- Teacher Identity and Tensions of Learning to Leverage Student Thinking in Math Teaching.- Section Commentary.- Learning Trajectories as a Tool for Mathematical Lesson Planning.- The Stages of Early Arithmetic Learning: A Context for Learning to Professionally Notice.- Writing Problems to Build on Children's Thinking: Tasks that Support Pre-Service Teacher Transitions.- Transitions in Prospective Mathematics Teacher Noticing.- Section Commentary.- Book Commentary. | This book uses expanded papers from the 2012 PME-NA Conference to convey important findings and illustrations of the breadth of work in the areas of mathematical knowledge for teaching, teacher characteristics that affect their instruction, and tools that support teacher development. In addition, commentaries on each section set the context for research in the area, pull together the ideas in the section, identify important issues raised by the chapters, and provide insight into what remains to be researched in that area. This book pulls together important ideas and puts them in a broader perspective. It is an important resource for graduate studies in mathematics teacher education and a useful information source for policy makers and professional development providers. | <p>Reports the newest empirical data on teaching mathematics </p><p>Results from 2012 PME-NA Annual Conference </p><p>Synthesizes information on teacher identity and teacher content [NAME]> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | [PHONE]-54-2 | Education | [NAME] | Chee-Hoo Lum, National Institute of Education, Nanyang Technological University, , Singapore | Contextualized Practices in Arts Education | An International Dialogue on Singapore | Education Innovation Series |  | 1 | 2014 | 440 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 440 p. 19 illus., 10 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Education | Arts Education | SCO11000 | JNU | Curriculum Studies | SCO15000 | JNKC | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Singapore | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part 1: Singapore Arts Landscape.- Part 2: Creative Music Making in [NAME] School.- Part 3: The Art of Digital Storytelling.- Part 4: Free Improvisation.- Part 5: Dance in Physical Education.- Part 6: Band Directing in Primary School.- Part 7: Integrating the Arts & Partnerships.- Part 8: Flow in Young Artists-in-Training.- Part 9: Weaving and Anchoring the Arts into Curriculum.- Part 10: Signature Pedagogies in the Visual Arts.- Part 11: Pedagogical Issues in Multicultural Music Education.- Part 12: Reflective Journeys of Music Teachers.- Part 13: Critical Dialogue with the Contemporary in Traditional Theatre Forms.- Part 14: Music Theory for the 21st Century Music Teacher.- Part 15: The Synaesthetic Mind & Ways of Knowing in the Arts. | This edited book not only makes a much-needed contribution to research in arts education but also provides a strong grounding of evidential support for Singapore arts education, in contrast to the current state of affairs in arts education in many parts of the world where severe cuts in funding, lackluster support for the arts and imperialist agendas are pervasive. The case of and for Singapore – presented in this edited book through rich descriptions of the dedicated, contextualized practices of arts educators, artists and researchers – offers readers many valuable lessons and reflections on the continued survival and advancement of arts education. | <p>An up-to-the-minute look at Singapore’s arts education strengths in the last decade</p><p>Provides a valuable comparison and contrast across arts education worldwide</p><p>Showcases exemplary arts education pedagogies and practices in Singapore</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7825-2 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Manchester, Manchester, UK; [NAME], University of East London, London, UK; Marion Jones, Liverpool John Moores University, Liverpool, UK | [NAME] in Teacher Education | International Practice and Policy | Professional Learning and Development in Schools and Higher Education | 10 | 1 | 2014 | 315 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 315 p. 14 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Education | Teaching and Teacher Education | SCO31000 | JNMT | Educational Policy and Politics | SCO19000 | JNF | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | Available | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 | 2013-11-14 00:00:00 |  | 1. Framing Workplace Learning.- 2. Developing a Multi-layered System of Distributed Expertise: What Does Cultural Historical Theory Bring to Understandings of Workplace Learning in School-University Partnerships?- 3. Developing Knowledge for Qualified Professionals.- 4. Work-based, Accredited Professional Education: Insights from Medicine.- 5. ‘In This Together’: Developing University-Workplace Partnerships in Initial Professional Training for Practitioner Educational Psychologists.- 6. Disentangling What it Means to Be a Teacher in the Twenty-first Century: Policy and Practice in Teachers’ Continuing Professional Learning.- 7. Pulling Learning Through: Building the Profession’s Skills in Making Use of Workplace Coaching Opportunities.- 8. Empowering Teachers as Learners: Continuing Professional Learning Programmes as Sites for Critical Development in Pedagogical Practice.- 9. Lesson Study in a Performative Culture.- 10. The Policy Context of Teachers’ Workplace Learning: The Case for Research-based Professionalism in Teacher Education in England.- 11. [NAME] in Pre-service Teacher Education: An English Case Study.- 12. Work-based Learning in Teacher Education: A Scottish Perspective.- 13. ‘Learningplace’ Practices and Initial Teacher Education in Ireland: Knowledge Generation, Partnerships and Pedagogy.- 14. [NAME] in the Workplace in Initial Teacher Education in Portugal: Potential and Limits from a Student Teacher Perspective.- 15. Learning to Teach in Norway: A Shared Responsibility.- 16. Teaching as a Master’s Level Profession in Finland: Theoretical Reflections and Practical Solutions.- 17. Improving Workplace Learning in Teacher Education. | This book explores teacher workplace learning from four different perspectives: social policy, international comparators, multi-professional stances/perspectives and socio-cultural theory. First, it considers the policy and practice context of professional learning in teacher education in England, and the rest of the UK, with particular reference to professional masters level provision. The importance of teachers’ and schools’ perceptions of improvement, development and learning, and the inherent tensions between individual, school and government priorities is explored. Second, the book considers models of teacher workplace learning to be found in international research and practice to explore what perspective they can bring to understanding policy and practice relating to workplace learning in the UK. Third, it draws on cross-professional analysis to get an intellectual and theoretical purchase on workplace learning by examining how insights from across the professions can provide us with useful perspectives on policy and practice. The analysis draws particularly on insights from medicine and educational psychology. Fourth, the book cross-fertilises research and practice across the field of education by drawing on insights from perspectives such as socio-cultural and activity theory and situated learning/cognition to discover what they can offer in analysing the theoretical and pedagogic underpinnings of teacher workplace learning. In short, the book offers a number of contexts for exploring how best to conceptualise and theorise learning in the workplace in order to generate evidence to inform policy and practice and facilitates the development of a more theoretically informed and robust model of workplace learning and teaching. | <p>Offers international comparators of the policy and practice relating to teacher education</p><p>Offers cross professional insights into teacher workplace learning</p><p><p>Presents the current state of research on teacher pre-service and continuing professional learning</p><p><p>Links several theoretical perspectives to significant practical and political issues</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7971-6 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Warwick, Coventry, UK; [NAME], University of South Australia, Magill, SA, Australia | Dynamic Ecologies | A Relational Perspective on Languages Education in the Asia-Pacific Region | Multilingual Education | 9 | 1 | 2014 | 259 | Hard cover | Book | I, 259 p. 12 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Education | Language Education | SCO23000 | CJ | Educational Policy and Politics | SCO19000 | JNF | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I The Changing Dynamics Between English Language and [NAME] in Asian Contexts.- 1. Introduction: A Relational View of Language Learning.- 2. English as a Medium of Instruction in East and Southeast Asian Universities.- 3. Plurilithic and Ecological Perspectives on English: Some Conceptual and Practical Implications.- 4. Global English in Singapore? A Re-exploration of the Localization of English.- 5. Asia and Anglosphere: Public Symbolism and Language Policy in Australia.- 6. English as Lingua Franca on Campus: Cultural Integration or Segregation?.- 7. Socioeconomic Disparities and Early English Education: A Case in Changzhou, China.- 8. English in Malaysia: An Inheritance from the Past and the Challenge for the Future.- Part II Asian Languages in Australia: The Challenges of Teaching, Learning and Assessment.- 9. Recognising the Diversity of Learner Achievements in Learning Asian Languages in School Education Settings.- 10. Dealing with ‘Chinese fever’: The Challenge of Chinese Teaching in the Australian Classroom.- 11. The Teaching and Learning of Indonesian in Australia: Issues and Prospects.- 12. On [NAME]: Monolingual Educational Structures and Japanese Language Education in Australia.- 13. Making Chinese Learnable for Beginning Second Language Learners?.- Part III Tensions in the Linguistic Space.- 14. Tensions in the Linguistic Space.- Index. | This volume provides a fascinating glimpse into the complex language ecologies of Southeast Asia. Adopting a relational perspective, it considers their significance for the region, its peoples, the policy and practice of language teaching, learning and assessment and the fate of local languages. It gives particular prominence to the relationship between English and Chinese, it's likely transformation at a time of significant global change and the impact that these two languages and their synergy will have on the place of other languages and dialects. Dynamic Ecologies: A Relational Perspective on Languages Education in the Asia-Pacific Region draws on the research and insights of key scholars in the field and provides case studies that illustrate the impact of relevant language policy in countries including Singapore, Malaysia, Hong Kong, South Korea and Australia. | <p>Focuses on the interaction between locally available languages in terms of policy and practice in language use and language learning</p><p>Presents a relational view of language planning and language learning</p><p>Provides a regional focus on a particularly dynamic geographical area, while identifying general principles that have relevance beyond the Asia-Pacific area</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8004-9 | Education | Paulsen | [NAME], University of Iowa, Iowa City, IA, USA | Higher Education: Handbook of Theory and Research | Volume 29 | Higher Education: Handbook of Theory and Research | 29 | 1 | 2014 | 633 | Hard cover | Book | X, 633 p. 29 illus., 2 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 239 | Education | Higher Education | SCO36000 | JNM | Educational Policy and Politics | SCO19000 | JNF | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. The Complexity of Higher Education: a Career in Academics and Activism; [NAME] 2. Advancing an Intersectionality Framework in Higher Education: Power and Latino Postsecondary Opportunity; [NAME] Núñez.- 3. Student Veterans in Higher Education; [NAME] and [NAME] 4. The Changing Nature of Cultural Capital; [NAME] and [NAME] 5. The Culturally Engaging Campus Environments (CECE) Model: A New Theory of Success among Racially Diverse College Student Populations; [NAME] 6. Organizational Identity in Higher Education: Conceptual and Empirical Perspectives; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] 7. Student Ratings of Instruction in College and University Courses; [NAME] and [NAME] 8. College Enrollment: an Economic Analysis; [NAME] 9. The Welding of Opposite Views: Land-Grant Historiography at 150 Years; [NAME] and [NAME] Geiger.- 10. The Completion Agenda: The Unintended Consequences for Equity in Community Colleges; Jaime Lester.- 11. Using IPEDS for Panel Analyses: Core Concepts, Data Challenges, and Empirical Applications; [NAME] and Edna E. Parra.- 12. Toward a Better Understanding of Equity in Higher Education Finance and Policy; [NAME]. | Published annually since 1985, the Handbook series provides a compendium of thorough and integrative literature reviews on a diverse array of topics of interest to the higher education scholarly and policy communities. Each chapter provides a comprehensive review of research findings on a selected topic critiques the research literature in terms of its conceptual and methodological rigor and sets forth an agenda for future research intended to advance knowledge on the chosen topic. The Handbook focuses on a comprehensive set of central areas of study in higher education that encompasses the salient dimensions of scholarly and policy inquiries undertaken in the international higher education community. Each annual volume contains chapters on such diverse topics as research on college students and faculty, organization and administration, curriculum and instruction, policy, diversity issues, economics and finance, history and philosophy, community colleges, advances in research methodology and more. The series is fortunate to have attracted annual contributions from distinguished scholars throughout the world. | <p>Authoritative in the field of higher education</p><p>Provides state-of-the-art reviews on a wide range of topics in the study of higher education</p><p>Attracts annual contributions from distinguished scholars around the world</p><p>Chapters are frequently cited in major higher education journals</p><p>An indispensable resource for administrators, researchers and policymakers in higher education</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7008-9 | Education | [NAME] | Wolff [NAME], [NAME], Australia | Graphs and Graphing in Scientific Discovery Work | Implications for and Applications in STEM Education |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 300 p. 50 illus. | 0 | approx. | 139 | Education | Science Education | SCO27000 | JNU | Mathematics Education | SCO25000 | JNU | Education | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | Planned | 2014-01-23 00:00:00 |  |  |  | This book describes and theorizes the function of graphs and graphing in scientific discovery work from a social practice perspective. In this work, graphs are both topic and tool. In discovery work, where scientists do not initially know what to make of graphs, there is a lot of uncertainty and scientists struggle in trying to make sense of what to make of graphs. Contrary to the belief that scientists unproblematically “interpret” graphs, the chapters in this book show that uncertainty about their research object is tied to uncertainty of the graphs. It may, as in this study, take several years of struggle in their workplace before scientists come to know just what their graphs are evidence of. Scientists may resist what eventually comes to be known as the correct interpretations – leading, as in the present case, to a discovery that overthrows what has been a 60-year scientific canon. Graphs turn out to stand to the entire research in a part/whole relation, where scientists not only need to be highly familiar with the context from which their data are extracted but also with the entire process by means of which the natural world comes to be transformed and represented in the graph. This has considerable implications for science, technology, engineering, and mathematics education at the secondary and tertiary level and in vocational training.  ​ | Further development of [NAME]'s 'anthropology of graphing' <br>Describes graphs and graphing in scientific discovery work from the initial study to the publication of a journal article <br>Raises serious doubts about teaching graphs and graphing independent of the settings in which they are produced   ​ | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8544-0 | Education | [NAME] | Elinor [NAME], Bar-Ilan University, [NAME], Israel; [NAME], Texas A&M University, College Station, TX, USA | Handbook of Arabic Literacy | Insights and Perspectives | Literacy Studies | 9 | 1 | 2014 | 779 | Hard cover | Book | I, 779 p. 38 illus. | 0 | final | 179 | Education | Literacy | SCO40000 | CFC | Arabic | SCN14000 | 2CSR | Education | Handbook | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  | worldwide | Preface.- Foreword.- Introduction.- PART ONE: THE ARABIC LANGUAGE. Chapter 1: The Structure of Arabic Language and Orthography.- PART TWO: ARABIC LEXICAL REPRESENTATION AND PROCESSING. Chapter 2: Is the Arabic Mental Lexicon Morpheme-based or Stem-based? Implications for Spoken and Written Word Recognition.- Chapter 3: Word Recognition in Arabic: Approaching a Language-Specific Reading Model.- Chapter 4: Why is it Hard to Read Arabic?.- PART THREE: ARABIC READING AND SPELLING DEVELOPMENT AND DISORDERS. Chapter 5: An Epidemiological Survey of Specific Reading and Spelling Disorders in Arabic Speaking Children in Egypt.- Chapter 6: Types of Developmental Dyslexia in Arabic.- Chapter 7: Narrative Development in Arabic: Story Re-telling.- Chapter 8: Cognitive Predictors of Early Reading Ability in Arabic: A Longitudinal Study from [NAME] to Grade 2.- PART FOUR: ARABIC DIGLOSSIA, LANGUAGE AND LITERACY. Chapter 9: The Effect of Diglossia on Literacy in Arabic and Other Languages.- Chapter 10: Acquiring Literacy in a Diglossic Context: Problems and Prospects.- Chapter 11: A New Look at Diglossia: Modality-Driven Distinctions between Spoken and Written Narratives in Jordanian Arabic.- Chapter 12: Literacy Acquisition and [NAME]: Textbooks in Israeli Arabic-speaking Schools.- Chapter 13: Diglossic Knowledge Development in Typically Developing Native Arabic-speaking Children and the Development of ADAT (Arabic Diglossic Knowledge and Awareness Test).- PART FIVE: ARABIC EMERGENT LITERACY: SOCIO-CULTURAL FACTORS. Chapter 14: The Development of Young Children’s Arabic Language and Literacy in the United Arab Emirates.- Chapter 15: Mother-Child Literacy Activities and Early Literacy in the Israeli Arab Family.- PART SIX: ARABIC LITERACY DEVELOPMENT IN SPECIAL POPULATIONS. Chapter 16: Environmental Contributions to Language and Literacy Outcomes in Bilingual English-Arabic Children in the U.S.A..- Chapter 17: The Development of Grapho-phonemic Representations among Native Hebrew Speakers Learning Arabic as a Foreign Language.- Chapter 18: [NAME] in Blind and Sighted Individuals: Educational Considerations and Experimental Evidence.- Subject Index.- Author Index. | This book provides a synopsis of recently published empirical research into the acquisition of reading and writing in Arabic. Its particular focus is on the interplay between the linguistic and orthographic structure of Arabic and the development of reading and writing/spelling. In addition, the book addresses the socio-cultural, political and educational milieu in which Arabic literacy is embedded. It enables readers to appreciate both the implications of empirical research to literacy enhancement and the challenges and limitations to the applicability of such insights in the Arabic language and literacy context. The book will advance the understanding of the full context of literacy acquisition in Arabic with the very many factors (religious, historical, linguistic etc.) that interact and will hence contribute to weakening the anglocentricity that dominates discussions of this topic. | <p>Brings together linguistics and the broader context of Arabic literacy [NAME]Combines new findings from empirical research with insights from scientific surveys</p><p>Constructs a comprehensive account of literacy in Arabic</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02422-6 | Education | Sims | [NAME], Knowledgecraft, Woodbum, NSW, Australia | [NAME] | Transforming the way we think about learning and teaching | Educational Communications and Technology: Issues and Innovations |  | 1 | 2014 | 275 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 275 p. 49 illus., 48 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Education | Educational Technology | SCO21000 | YQT | Learning & Instruction | SCO22000 | JNT | Education | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreward.- Preface.-   Why Alchemy?.- Why Design Alchemy?.- How did Design Alchemy emerge?.- Which Learning Theories?.- Instructional Design or Design Alchemy?.- Learning Design or Design Alchemy?.- Insight or Distraction?.- What is the Design Alchemy Pedagogy?.- How Does the Design Alchemist Practice?.- What Are the Assets of Design Alchemy?.- [NAME] and Courses.- Activities and Assessment.- Understanding Design Alchemy.- Design Alchemy Templates.- Design Alchemy: A Manifesto.- Index. | The provision of online learning is increasing almost exponentially, with both established and emerging educational institutions creating new and revised courses to meet the needs of students demanding flexible access and delivery. However, the staff recruited to support this development often does not have the design skills or experience to generate courses that bear the hallmarks of effective online learning experiences. While the principles associated with the practice of instructional design provided pedagogical guidance for these design efforts, it remains commonplace for courses to present as little more than information delivery with no clear strategies for student engagement and interaction. The purpose of this book is to expand on the design concepts documented by the lead author and to present both a design framework and design strategies that will allow organisations to provide courses that embed the affordances of the online, social environment and maximize opportunities for engagement and learning in formal learning contexts. The authors contend that to truly achieve the potential of learning in an online environment, designers need to be alchemists - ensuring the current face-to-face classroom 'gold' is not turned to lead and to transform those 'leaden' online courses that do not engage or provide interaction into motivating and engaging 'golden' learning experiences. | <p>Uses colloquial language to explain instructional design </p><p>Documents state of the art strategies for online learning environments </p><p>Presents educational design theory and provides practice strategies for researchers and practitioners alike</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-6257-6 | Education | Singer | Florence Mihaela Singer, University of Ploiesti, Bucharest, Romania; [NAME], Illinois State University, Normal, IL, USA; [NAME], University of Delaware, Newark, DE, USA | Mathematical Problem Posing | From Research to Effective Practice |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 300 p. 50 illus. | 0 | approx. | 179.95 | Education | Mathematics Education | SCO25000 | JNU |  |  |  | Education | Contributed volume | Springer New York | Planned | 2014-03-15 00:00:00 |  |  | ​Mathematical [NAME] and Research: 1970-2010.- [NAME] From a Modelling Perspective.- Conceptualizing Problem Posing Via Transformation.- Developing a Problem-Posing Pedagogy From the History of Mathematics.- On the Relationship Between Problem Posing, [NAME] and Creativity​.- Is Problem Posing a Tool for Developing Mathematical Creativity?.- Using Digital Technology for Mathematical Problem Posing.- [NAME] in Mathematics – The Relevance of Philosophy for Children (P4C).- [NAME] as Lenses for Understanding and Improving Students’ Learning of Mathematics.- Examining [NAME] in Different Grade Levels: How Students Posed Problems-To-Solve.- [NAME] by Way of Mediated Activity at Grades Four and five.- Enhancing the Development of Chinese Fifth-Graders’ Problem Posing and Problem Solving Abilities, Beliefs, and Attitudes: A Design Experiment.- If You Don't Know Why Do You Ask?.- [NAME] to Provide Students with Content Related Motives to Proceed​.- Providing [NAME] with Opportunities to Pose problems Through Data Modeling.-  Mathematical Problem Posing Activities Using Computers.- An Investigation of High School Students’ Mathematical Problem Posing in the United States and China​.- Studying the Evolution of Problem Posing in Relatively Constrained Situations.- Mathematical Problem Posing in Chinese Classrooms.- [NAME] as a Pedagogical Strategy: A Teacher's Perspective'​.- [NAME] as a Motivational Tool in Primary School Teachers Training.- In-Service Mathematics Teachers as Composers of Problems for Their Teaching: A Preliminary Study.- The Poznan Theater Problem: Exploring Problem-Posing and Problem-Solving in the Route to Self-Guided Discovery in Developmental Mathematics Classes​.- [NAME] in a Collegiate Geometry Class.- From Proof to Investigations and Back to Proof in Geometry.- Developing the Problem Posing Abilities of Prospective Elementary and Middle School Teachers.- Conceptualizing Problem Posing Through Teachers’ Thinking in Posing Mathematical Word Problems.- [NAME] in the Training of Prospective Elementary Teachers: A Review.- [NAME] as an Integral Component of the Mathematics Curriculum: A Study with Prospective Middle-School Teachers​. | The mathematics education community continues to contribute research-based ideas for developing and improving problem posing as an inquiry-based instructional strategy for enhancing students’ learning.  A large number of studies have been conducted which have covered many research topics and methodological aspects of teaching and learning mathematics through problem posing. The Authors' groundwork has shown that many of these studies predict positive outcomes from implementing problem posing on:  student knowledge, problem solving and posing skills, creativity, and disposition toward mathematics . This book examines, in-depth, the contribution of a problem posing approach to teaching mathematics and discusses the impact of adopting this approach on the development of theoretical frameworks, teaching practices, and research on mathematical problem posing over the last 50 years. ​​ | <p>​Describes significant trends of problem posing in school mathematics </p><p>Outlines the importance of appropriate problem posing in the classroom </p><p>Illustrates problem posing technique for pre-service teachers </p><p>Investigates the impact of problem posing and problem solving activities utilizing cultural artifacts</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7611-1 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME], McGill University, Montreal, QC, Canada | Faculty Development in the Health Professions | A Focus on Research and Practice | Innovation and Change in Professional Education | 11 | 1 | 2014 | 439 | Hard cover | Book | XXXV, 439 p. 19 illus., 12 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 179 | Education | Professional & Vocational Education | [NAME] | JNRV | Medical Education | SCO26000 | JNU | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Section I – Introduction.- 1. Faculty Development: Core Concepts and Principles; Yvonne Steinert.- Section II – The Scope of Faculty Development.- 2. Faculty Development for Teaching Improvement; [NAME] and [NAME] Wilkerson.- 3. Faculty Development for Leadership and Management; [NAME] and [NAME]. Faculty Development for Research Capacity Building; [NAME] Hodges.- 5. Faculty Development for Academic and Career Development; [NAME] Leslie.- 6. Faculty Development for Organizational Change; Brian Jolly.- Section III – Approaches to Faculty Development.- 7. Learning from Experience: From Workplace Learning to Communities of Practice; Yvonne Steinert.- 8. [NAME] Mentorship; [NAME] and Michelle Elizov.- 9. Workshops and Seminars: Enhancing Effectiveness; Willem de Grave, Anneke Zanting, [NAME] and [NAME] 10. Intensive Longitudinal Faculty Development Programs; [NAME] Gruppen.- 11. Faculty Development Online; [NAME] Section IV – Practical Applications.- 12. Faculty Development to Promote Role-Modeling and Reflective Practice; [NAME] 13. Faculty Development for Curriculum Change: Towards Competency-Based Teaching and Assessment; [NAME] Snell.- 14. Faculty Development for Interprofessional Education and Practice; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Hammick.- 15. International Faculty Development Partnerships; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Norcini.- 16. Starting a Faculty Development Program; Ivan Silver.- Section V – Research and Scholarship in Faculty Development.- 17. Faculty Development Research: The ‘State of the Art’ and Future Trends; [NAME] Spencer.- 18. Promoting Scholarship in Faculty Development: Relevant Research Paradigms and Methodologies; [NAME] and [NAME] 19. Faculty Development and Knowledge Translation: From Theory to Practice; [NAME] and Yvonne Steinert.- Section VI – Conclusion.- 20. Faculty Development: Future Directions; Yvonne Steinert. | This volume addresses all facets of faculty development, including academic and career development, teaching improvement, research capacity building, and leadership development. In addition, it describes a multitude of ways, ranging from workshops to the workplace, in which health professionals can develop their knowledge and skills. By providing an informed and scholarly overview of faculty development, and by describing original content that has not been previously published, this book helps to ensure that research and evidence inform practice, moves the scholarly agenda forward, and promotes dialogue and debate in this evolving field. It will prove an invaluable resource for faculty development program planning, implementation and evaluation, and will help to sustain faculty members’ vitality and commitment to excellence. [NAME], M.D., Ph.D., May 2013: In this text, [NAME] and her colleagues have provided a significant contribution to the future of faculty development. In an academic and comprehensive way, the authors have both documented past efforts in faculty development as well as provided guidance and stimuli for the future. The scholarly and well-referenced chapters provide a compendium of methods previously used while emphasizing the expanding areas deserving work. Moreover, the writers consistently elucidate the faculty development process by highlighting the theoretical underpinnings of faculty development and the research conducted. Thus, the book provides an important resource for two major groups, current providers and researchers in faculty development as well as those desiring to enter the field.  Both groups of readers can benefit from a reading of the entire book or by delving into their major area of interest and passion. In so doing, they will better understand our successes and our limitations in this emerging field. Faculty development in the health professions has now received attention for 6 decades. Yet, dedicated faculty members trying to address the challenges in medical education and the health care delivery system do not have all the assistance they need to achieve their goals. This book provides a valuable resource towards that end. | <p>Is the first comprehensive review of faculty development in the health professions, filling a critical gap in the literature</p><p>Takes a broad perspective on faculty development and addresses faculty members’ roles as teachers and educators, leaders and managers, and researchers and scholars</p><p>Examines both research and practice, suggests new ways of helping faculty members to achieve their potential, and describes future directions and areas of inquiry </p><p>Represents the collective efforts of an experienced team of international and interprofessional scholars and educators</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8665-2 | Education | Viennot | [NAME], Université de Paris VII, Paris Cedex 5, France | Thinking in Physics | The pleasure of reasoning and understanding |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 168 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 168 p. 58 illus., 5 illus. in color. | 0 | approx. | 139 | Education | Science Education | SCO27000 | JNU | Teaching and Teacher Education | SCO31000 | JNMT | Education | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | Planned | 2014-01-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- Foreword to the French Edition.- Preface.- Part I Learning to think: words, images and functions.- 1 Essential tools for comprehension.- 2 Some surprising invariances.- 3 Analysis of functional dependence: a powerful tool.- 4 Putting things into practice.- Part II Physics: linking factors.- 5 Links between phenomena in terms of type of functional dependence.- 6 The relationship between different approaches to the same phenomenon.- Part III Simplicity: ruin or triumph of coherence?.- 7 Optimising simple experiments.- 8 Popularising physics: what place for reasoning?.- 9 Conclusion.- Appendix A - What this book owes to physics education research.- Appendix B - The weight of air and molecular impacts: how do they relate?.- Appendix C –Causal  linear reasoning.- Appendix D - When physics should conform to beliefs: pierced bottles.- Appendix E – Reactions of trainee journalists and scientific writers confronted with [NAME] – “Facilitating elements' of communication: Year 11 students ranking the risks of misunderstanding. | Read this book if you care about students really understanding physics and getting genuine intellectual satisfaction from doing so. Read it too if you fear that this goal is out of reach – you may be surprised! [NAME] here shows ways to deal with the awkward fact that common sense thinking is often not the same as scientific thinking. She analyses examples of frequent and widespread errors and confusions, which provide a real eye-opener for the teacher. More than that, she shows ways to avoid and overcome them. The book argues against over-emphasis on “fun” applications, demonstrating that students also enjoy and value clear thinking. The book has three parts:  • making sense of special scientific ways of reasoning (words, images, functions) • making connections between very different topics, each illuminating the other • simplifying, looking for consistency and avoiding incoherent over-simplification The book is enhanced with supplementary online materials that will allow readers to further expand their teaching or research interests and think about them more deeply. | <p>Offers practical examples of appropriate teaching practices</p><p>Emphasizes the value of the process of reasoning</p><p>Exposes many of the distorted or false interpretations common in much current physics teaching</p><p>Includes a Foreword by [NAME], former CNRS Director General</p><p>Enriched with illustrations, a comprehensive bibliography and online supplementary materials</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-90-6704-935-1 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], Anglia Ruskin University, Cambridge, UK; [NAME], T.M.C. Asser Instituut, The Hague, The Netherlands | Sports Image Rights in Europe and Beyond |  | ASSER International Sports Law Series |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 450 p. 2 illus. | 0 | approx. | 149 | Law | International Sports Law | [NAME] | LNJS | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | Law | Contributed volume | T.M.C. Asser Press | Planned | 2014-02-15 00:00:00 |  |  |  | Sport has developed into a multi-billion dollar a year industry around the world. Understanding sports image rights as a marketing tool is even more important today. The 2005 publication of Sports Image Rights in Europe, at the time believed to be the first of its kind, provided a concise legal and practical overview of the creation, protection and enforcement of sports image rights in EU Member States, Norway, Switzerland and the USA, along with separate chapters dealing with contracts and taxation. Sports Image Rights in Europe and Beyond, is an update to the original volume and expands the scope even further into the European and international arena, incorporating recent legal and regulatory changes, and addressing the impacts of technology and recent case law on the ever expanding environment of sports image rights. | <p>Provides a comprehensive overview of the international arena of sports image rights </p><p>Facilitates a comparative of sports image rights laws in various countries </p><p>Includes a table of legislation and cases that can be used as a reference</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7925-9 | Law | Corlett | [NAME], San Diego State University, San Diego, CA, USA | Responsibility and  Punishment |  | Library of Ethics and Applied Philosophy | 29 | 4 | 2014 | 269 | Soft cover | Book | X, 269 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Law | Theories of Law, Philosophy of Law, Legal History | SCR11011 | LAB | Philosophy | SCE00003 | HP | Law | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        Introduction                                                                                             1: The Problem of Responsibility,- 2: The Problem of Punishment.-3: The Socratic Roots of Retributivism.- 4: Foundations of a Kantian Retributivism.- 5: [NAME] Retributivism.- 6: Retributivism and Recidivism.- 7: Forgiveness, Apology, and Retributive Punishment.-    8: Capital Punishment.- 9: The Problem of Collective Responsibility.-10: Corporate Responsibility and Punishment.-11: U.S. Responsibility for War Crimes in Iraq.-Conclusion | This volume provides discussions of both the concept of responsibility and of punishment, and of both individual and collective responsibility. It provides in-depth Socratic and Kantian bases for a new version of retributivism, and defends that version against the main criticisms that have been raised against retributivism in general. It includes chapters on criminal recidivism and capital punishment, as well as one on forgiveness, apology and punishment that is congruent with the basic precepts of the new retributivism defended therein. Finally, chapters on corporate responsibility and punishment are included, with a closing chapter on holding the U.S. accountable for its most recent invasion and occupation of Iraq. The book is well-focused but also presents the widest ranging set of topics of any book of its kind as it demonstrates how the concepts of responsibility and punishment apply to some of the most important problems of our time.“This is one of the best books on punishment, and the Fourth Edition continues its tradition of excellence.  The book connects punishment importantly to moral responsibility and desert, and it is comprehensive in its scope, both addressing abstract, theoretical issues and applied issues as well.  The topics treated include collective responsibility, apology, forgiveness, capital punishment, and war crimes.  Highly recommended.”—John [NAME], Distinguished Professor of Philosophy, University of California, Riverside. | <p>Provides solid link between concepts of responsibility and punishment </p><p>Provides a defence of a new retributivist analysis of punishment </p><p>Provides discussions of timely topics in the law such as capital punishment, corporate responsibility and punishment, and the U.S.'s responsibility for its recent invasion and occupation of Iraq</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-41211-0 | Law | Fenwick | [NAME], Kyushu University, Fukuoka, Japan; [NAME], Kyushu University, Fukuoka, Japan; [NAME], Kyushu University, Fukuoka, Japan | Networked Governance, Transnational Business and the Law |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 313 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 313 p. 7 illus. | 0 | final | 179 | Law | International Economic Law, Trade Law | [NAME] | LBBM | Public Administration | SCW27000 | JPP | Law | Contributed volume | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2013-11-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction: Networks and Networked Governance.- Networked Governance, Network Actors & the Limits of the Law.- From Protected National Markets to Networked Governance? Regulatory Revolution in the EU Aviation Sector.- Unpacking Legal Network Power: The Structural Construction of Transnational Legal Expert Networks.- Science Based Governance? EU Food Regulation Submitted to Risk Analysis.- Regulatory Networks, Population Level Effects & Threshold Models of Collective Action.- Intermediaries, Trust and Efficiency of Communication: A Social Network Perspective.- Ethical Trade Networks as a Catalyst for Corporate Compliance with Human Rights.- Networked Governance: From Democratic Deficit to Substantive Legitimacy.- The Dilemma of European Consumer Representation in Deliberative Networks – The Democratic Deficit in the Context of the Drafting of the Common European Sales Law.- The “European Business Register EEIG” as a Network of European Commercial Registers.- The International Competition Network, its Leniency Best Practice and Legitimacy: An Argument for Introducing a Review System.- Networked Governance, Investment and Finance.- Evolving Hierarchies in Transnational Financial Networked Governance: The Relationship between the International Accounting Standards Board, the Financial Stability Board and the G-20.- The OECD Principles of Corporate Governance in Emerging Markets: A Successful Example of Networked Governance?.- The Role of Investor Networks in Transnational Corporate Governance. | This book brings together a unique range of case studies focusing on networks in the context of business regulation. The case studies form the basis for an interdisciplinary dialogue on the meaning, value and the limits of the 'network concept' as a tool for understanding and critically evaluating the emergent transnational legal order. | <p>Focusing on networked governance in a business law context </p><p>Unique range of case studies focusing on networks </p><p>Interdisciplinary dialogue on the meaning, value and the limits of the network concept</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-44945-1 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], Düsseldorf, Germany | International Environmental “soft law” | The Functions and Limits of Nonbinding Instruments in International Environmental Governance and [NAME] | Beiträge [NAME] öffentlichen [NAME] und Völkerrecht | 247 | 1 | 2013 | 503 | Hard cover | Book | XXI, 503 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Law | International Environmental Law | SCR19070 | LBBP | Environmental Law/Policy/Ecojustice | SCU16002 | LNKJ | Law | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I: Nonbinding instruments in international practice.- Part II: The role and limits of nonbinding instruments.- Part III: The legitimacy of nonbinding instruments.- Part IV: Concluding summary. | In international negotiations, the question of the design and the legal form of the negotiated instrument is as complex as it is often controversial. Intended as a read for both practitioners and academics, this book provides a comprehensive treatise of the characteristics, the potential and the limits of nonbinding instruments in international environmental law and governance. An extensive overview and typology of nonbinding instruments as well as several case studies from the areas of fisheries (FAO), hazardous substances (UNEP/FAO) and corporate social responsibility (OECD) provide the material for an in-depth analysis of the role of nonbinding instruments on all levels of governance. The book demonstrates the potential but also highlights the limits of nonbinding instruments in the interplay with customary and treaty law (e.g. UNCLOS, WTO) as bases for interinstitutional linkages and as tools to shape the behaviour of states and private actors. Legitimacy challenges arising from this form of exercise of authority are then discussed in the final chapter, alongside with remedies to address possible concerns. | <p>Comprehensive overview, many examples and in-depth case studies provide rich reference material for both practice and research</p><p>Analysis of functions and limits will enable decision-makers to take more informed decisions on legal form</p><p>Legitimacy analysis with its specific focus on nonbinding norms provides a new perspective for researchers and gives suggestions for practitioners working in national government, NGOs and international institutions</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7598-5 | Law | Haeck | [NAME], Ghent University, Ghent, Belgium; Eva Brems, Ghent University, Ghent, Belgium | Human Rights and Civil Liberties in the 21st Century |  | Ius Gentium: Comparative Perspectives on [NAME] and Justice | 30 | 1 | 2014 | 262 | Hard cover | Book | X, 262 p. 7 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Law | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | [NAME] | SCR20000 | LB | Law | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | Available | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 | 2013-11-19 00:00:00 |  | Introduction; [NAME] and Eva Brems.- Interpretation and Application of the European Convention on Human Rights in the Broader Context of International Law: Myth or Reality?; Cesare Pitea.- Universal Human Rights Law in the United States; Mortimer N.S. Sellers.- The Duty of Cooperation of the Respondent State during the Proceedings before the European Court of Human Rights; Helena De Vylder and Yves Haeck.- Protection by the Law: The Positive Obligation to Develop a Legal Framework to Adequately Protect ECHR Rights; Laurens Lavrysen.- The Adjudication Process and Reasoning at the International Criminal Court: the Lubanga Trial Chamber Judgment, Sentencing and Reparations; [NAME] and Katherine Cleary.- Interim Measures before the Inter-American and African Human Rights Commissions – Strengths and Weaknesses; [NAME] and Frans Viljoen.- The Law of the Sea and Human Rights in the Hirsi Jamaa and Others v. Italy Judgment of the European Court of Human Rights; Jasmine Coppens.- New Frontiers in American Capital Punishment Litigation; [NAME] Freedman.- The Impact of European Human Rights on Childbirth; Marlies Eggermont.- Res Interpretata: Legal Effect of the European Court of Human Rights’ Judgments for other States than those which were Party to the Proceedings; [NAME] Bodnar.- About the Authors. | This volume contributes to the on-going legal discussion on pressing procedural and substantial law issues in the ambit of international human rights and civil liberties. While the 20th century has seen the true awakening of human rights, the 21st century poses new challenges to this ever-unfolding area of law. Not only do international tribunals and quasi-tribunals worldwide and domestic US and European continental courts have to deal with increasing numbers of complaints and petitions from individuals and groups on a vast array of societal problems, the legal issues put to them are sometimes extremely difficult to resolve as they relate to very sensitive issues. This book examines issues ranging from the status of human rights under US law to the status of the ECHR in the broader context of international law. It looks at the role of positive obligations in the case law of the Strasbourg Court, as well the impact of its case-law on childbirth and push-back operation towards boat people, but also at the growing unwillingness of ECHR member states to cooperate with the Strasbourg Court. It explores the new frontiers in US Capital punishment litigation, the first case before the International Criminal Court and the legal effect of judgments of the European Court on third states.​ | <p>Brings together US and European scholars on a range of key human rights issues </p><p>Deals with legal frontier human rights issues in Europe and the Americas </p><p>Elaborates upon the reasoning of national and international adjudicators</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7397-4 | Law | Halberstam | [NAME], University of Michigan Law School, Ann Arbor, MI, USA; [NAME], University of Michigan Law School, Ann Arbor, MI, USA | Federalism and Legal Unification | A Comparative Empirical Investigation of Twenty Systems | Ius Gentium: Comparative Perspectives on [NAME] and Justice | 28 | 1 | 2014 | 559 | Hard cover | Book | X, 559 p. 10 illus., 3 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 179 | Law | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | Political Science, general | SCX18000 | JPA | Law | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | Available | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 | 2013-11-22 00:00:00 |  | Contents.- Preface.- Part One.- Federalism and Legal Unification: Comparing Methods, Results, and Explanations Across Twenty Systems; [NAME] and Mathias Reimann.- Part Two National Reports.- The Argentine Federal Legislative System; Alfredo Vítolo.- The Australian Federation: A Story Of The Centralization Of Power; [NAME] and Michelle Foster.- Federalism and Legal Unification in Austria; [NAME] and Anna Gamper.- Belgium: A Broken Marriage?; Alain-Laurent Verbeke.- Federalism and Legal Unification in Brazil; [NAME] and [NAME] Of Laws In Federal Systems: The Canadian Model; Aline Grenon.- The European Union: A Federation in All But Name; [NAME], Hanne Cuyckens and Thomas Ramopoulos.- Unification of Laws in the Federal System of Germany; [NAME] and Christoph Möllers.- India: From Political Federalism and Fiscal Centralization to Greater Subnational Autonomy; Sunita Parikh.- Emergence of the Italian Unitary Constitutional System, Modified by Supranational Norms and Italian Regionalism; [NAME] and [NAME] Duca.- Federalism and Legal Unification in Malaysia; Ang Hean Leng and Amanda Whiting.- Federalism and Legal Unification in Mexico; [NAME], [NAME] and  [NAME] Varona.- How Federal is the Russian Federation?; [NAME], Alexei Trochev and Nikolay Balayan.- Federalism and Legal Unification in South Africa; Karthy Govender.- The Trend Towards Homogenization in the Spanish ‘State of Autonomies’; [NAME] Federalism and Legal Unification in Switzerland; [NAME] and Anne-SOPHIE Papeil.- The United Kingdom: Devolution and Legal Unification; Stathis Banakas.- United States Federalism: Harmony Without Unity; [NAME]: The End of Federalism?; [NAME] and [NAME] Kleinheisterkamp.- Contributors.- Index. | How and to what degree do federations produce uniform law within their system?  This comparative empirical study addresses these questions comprehensively for the first time.  Originally produced under the auspices of the International Academy of Comparative Law, this volume examines legal unification in twenty federations around the world. Each of the successive chapters presents the forces of unification through the lens of a particular federal system.  A comparative overview chapter provides a detailed analysis of the overall results with compelling visual illustrations of legal unification along different dimensions (e.g. by area of law; by federation; by civil vs common law system).  The overview chapter summarizes and analyzes the means and methods of legal unification and the degree of legal unification of each system, and explains the driving forces of legal unity and diversity in federations more generally.  The volume presents surprising findings that should make scholars rethink their abandonment of the civil law vs. common law distinction in comparative law. ​ This book is a milestone in the study of federalism. It is a rare and welcome melding of comparative law and comparative politics using both original data and qualitative analysis. Wide-ranging, probing, and definitive, this book is an invaluable resource for students of law, politics, and multi-level governance.[NAME], Burton Craige Professor, UNC-Chapel Hill, and Chair in Multilevel Governance, [NAME] | <p>The first comprehensive study of federalism and legal unification</p><p>Includes surprising findings that should make scholars rethink their abandonment of the civil/law common/law distinction in comparative law </p><p>Endorsed by the International Academy of Comparative Law, the world's premier association for the study of comparative law​</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-44901-7 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], Beijing Normal University, Beijing, People's Republic of China | China and International Human Rights | Harsh Punishments in the Context of the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 325 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 325 p. | 0 | final | 179 | Law | Human Rights | SCR19020 | JPVH | Regional and Cultural Studies | [NAME] | GTB | Law | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- A general theory on international human rights standards.- China’s cooperation (With the international human rights system).- The death penalty and international human rights law.- The death penalty: china’s practice and policy.- Forced labor and international human rights law.- Forced labor: china’s policy and practice.- Next steps: china’s human rights strategy.- Conclusion.- Appendix. | This book is designed to introduce law students, legal actors and human rights activists, particularly participants in human rights dialogues with China, to the process and reality of a newly confident China’s participation in the international human rights system, albeit with inherent challenges. From an international and comparative perspective, one of the key findings of the author's research is that progress towards human rights depends more on judges than on legislators. Chinese legislators have enacted a series of reforms in order to better protect human rights. Unfortunately, these reforms have not led to greater adherence to China’s international human rights obligations in practice. The reforms failed because they have generally been misunderstood by Chinese judges, who often have a limited understanding of international human rights norms. Specifically, this book will examine how judicial misunderstandings have blocked reforms in one specific area, the use of severe punishments, based on international human rights theory and case studies and data analyses. This examination has several purposes. The first is to suggest that China ratify the ICCPR as the next step for its substantive progress in human rights and as a good preparation for its re-applying to be a member of the UN Human Right Council in the future. The second is to explain how judges could be better educated in international human rights norms so as to greatly reduce the use of severe punishments and better comply with China's human rights obligations. The third is to demonstrate how the international community could better engage with China in a manner that is more conducive to human rights improvements. The author's ultimate goal is to enhance dialogue on human rights in China between judges and the Chinese government, between Chinese judges and their foreign counterparts and between China's government and the international community.Another significant aim of this book is to clarify the controversial question of what obligations China should undertake before its ratification of the ICCPR and to re-examine trends in its developing human rights policy after standing down from the Council in late 2012. The tortuous progress of China’s criminal law and criminal justice reforms has confirmed that Chinese judges need further instruction on how to apply severe punishments in a manner consistent with international standards. Judges should be encouraged to exercise more discretion when sentencing so that penalties reflect the intent of relevant domestic laws as well as the international human rights standards enumerated in the ICCPR. In order to better educate and train judges, this book contains introductory chapters that examine the severe punishments currently available to Chinese judges from an international human rights perspective. To illustrate how Chinese justice currently falls short of international norms, this paper also examines several cases that are considered to be indicative of China’s progress towards greater respect for human rights and the rule of law. These cases demonstrate that China still has a long way to go to achieve its goals, at least before abolishing the death penalty, forced labor and torture. | <p>Case studies and the latest data help the reader to learn the major factors leading to harsh punishments and human right abuses in today’s China</p><p>A special chapter on the Next Steps for a Human Rights Strategy prepares readers for the future, building on China’s good first step of ratifying the ICCPR early on</p><p>Includes tips on how to avoid misunderstandings in human rights dialogues, particularly those between China and the international community</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03547-5 | Law | Kategekwa | [NAME], Geneva, Switzerland | Opening Markets for Foreign Skills: How Can the WTO Help? | Lessons from the EU and Uganda's Regional Services Deals |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 248 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 248 p. 9 illus., 7 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Law | International Economic Law, Trade Law | [NAME] | LBBM | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Conceptual Issues.- The Economic Importance of Mode 4.- Character and Trends in Existing Mode 4 Commitments in the GATS.- A Case Study of the EU Schedule of Specific Commitments.- A Case Study of Uganda's Schedule of Specific Commitments on Mode 4 in the GATS.- Prospects for Change in the DDA. | The Mode 4 commitments of WTO Members are narrow and shallow. Even though trade negotiations for enhanced Mode 4 access started well before the launch of the DDA- prospects for success are thin. These negotiations followed a traditional mercantilist approach- with limited attention to the underlying difficulties countries face in letting people into their borders, either generally, or on the basis of a WTO GATS commitment. This Book argues that this approach alone will not succeed. It proposes a focus not on trading market access concessions only, but on discussions aimed at understanding each other's regulatory approaches. To date, in terms of the literature available, we know very little about how WTO Members are managing their Mode 4 commitments. We know even less about how the WTO could learn from clearly more advanced steps in regional liberalization processes. This Book addresses these issues- through case studies of market access and national treatment commitments, and regulatory approaches in Economic Integration Agreements of a select group of WTO Members. | <p>An easy to read, user friendly resource guide to understanding WTO Law on Trade in Services in general and Mode 4 in particular</p><p>A special chapter on the next frontier in WTO engagement on labor mobility</p><p>A resource guide on best practices in regulating labor mobility in the WTO context</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02954-2 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Lucerne, Luzern, Switzerland | Indigenous Cultural Heritage and Intellectual Property Rights | Learning from the New Zealand Experience? |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 316 | Hard cover | Book | XVI, 316 p. 6 illus., 4 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 179 | Law | International IT and Media [NAME], Intellectual Property Law | SCR19100 | LN | Cultural Heritage | SCV35000 | JFC | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Introduction.- 2. Maori Culture in the Contemporary World.- 3. Intellectual Property and Other Intangibles.- 4. Guardianship and the Wai 262 Report.- 5. Bringing it all Together: An Overall Reflection. | Now more than ever, indigenous peoples’ interests in their cultural heritage are in the spotlight. Yet, there is very little literature that comprehensively discusses how existing laws can and cannot be used to address indigenous peoples’ interests. This book assesses how intangible aspects of indigenous cultural heritage (and the tangible objects that hold them) can be protected, within the realm of a broad range of existing legal orders, including intellectual property and related rights, consumer protection law, common law and equitable doctrines, and human rights. It does so by focusing on the New Zealand Māori. The book also looks to the future, analysing the long-awaited Wai 262 report, released in New Zealand by the Waitangi Tribunal in response to allegations that the government had failed in its duty to ensure that the Māori retain chieftainship over their tangible and intangible treasures, as required by the Treaty of Waitangi, signed between the Māori and the British Crown in 1840. | <p>Comprehensively deals with the situation in New Zealand</p><p>Offers an academic analysis with practical application of New Zealand law for intangible indigenous cultural heritage</p><p>Offers a practical solution through analysing the Wai 262 Report</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-41023-9 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], China University of Political Science and Law, Beijing, People's Republic of China; [NAME], Skadden, Arps, Slate, Meagher & Flom LLP, San Francisco, CA, USA | Concise Chinese Tort Laws |  | China-EU Law Series | 1 | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 280 p. | 0 | approx. | 139 | Law | [NAME] | SCR1200X | LAFD | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | Law | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | Planned | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Part 1 Torts in Theory.- The Development of Tort Law in China.- Tortious Act and Tort Liability.- Imputation Principles of Tort Liability.- Elements of Tort Liability.- Joint Tort Liability.- Affirmative Defenses Against Tort Liability.- General Tort Liability.- Special Provisions on Liable Parties.- Special Tort Liability.- Form of Tortious Liability.- Methods for Assuming Liability.- Damage Compensation.- Part 2 Torts in Statute.- General Provisions.- Constituting Liability and Methods of Assuming Liability.- Circumstances to Waive Liability and Mitigate Liability.- Special Provisions on Tortfeasors.- Product Liability.- Liability for Motor Vehicle Traffic Accident.- Liability for Medical Malpractice.- Liability for Environmental Pollution.- Liability for Ultrahazardous Activities.- Liability for Harm Caused by Domestic Animals.- Liability for Harm Caused by Objects.- Supplementary Provision.- Part 3 Torts in Practice.- General Provisions.- Constituting Liability and Methods of Assuming Liability.- General Tort Liability.- Defenses for Tort Liability.- Special Provisions on Tortfeasors.- Product Liability.- Liability for Motor Vehicle Traffic Accident.- Liability for Medical Malpractice.- Liability for Environmental Pollution.- Liability for Ultrahazardous Activities.- Liability for Harm Caused by Domestic Animals.- Liability for Harm Caused by Objects. | The explosive economic development in China over the last three decades has created social challenges unprecedented in the country's history. In response, China has overhauled its existing tort laws and even created new tort laws. By exploring its principles, theories and history, this book provides international readers a fresh outlook on China's tort law system. [NAME] that some concepts or theories in China's modern tort laws were 'borrowed' from the west, the principles behind them can nevertheless often find their roots in ancient Chinese philosophies, concepts or even laws. This book also uses real cases to explain the courts' application of China's tort laws and the meaning of the corresponding statutes. | <p>The first book (and probably the only book to date) on China's tort law that was written in English for international audiences </p><p>Explains the theories, legislative processes and applications of China's modern tort law from three different standpoints (academic, statute and case law perspectives), providing a comprehensive view of the law's past, present and future </p><p>Mr. [NAME], one of the two authors recently received a letter from President [NAME], acknowledging his excellent contribution and achievements</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03487-4 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], Sultan Qaboos University College of Law, Al-Khod, Muscat, Oman | Effects of Insurance on Maritime Liability Law | A Legal and Economic Analysis |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 205 | Hard cover | Book | XVIII, 205 p. | 0 | final | 179 | Law | Law of the Sea, Air and [NAME] | [NAME] | LBB | Insurance | SCW23160 | KFFN | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Introduction.- 2. Lack of Insurance and Its Effect on Maritime Liability Law: A Historical Evaluation.- 3. Insurance and Limitation of Ship owners’ Liability: An Economic Analysis.- 4. Insurance through General Average: Its Justifications and Effects on Optimal Care and on Social Costs.- 5. Maritime Cargo Liability Regimes in Light of Insurance Realities.- 6. Role of Insurance in Providing Adequate Compensation for Oil Pollution Damage and in Reducing Oil Pollution Incidents.- 7. Incentive Effect of Liability Rules in the Presence of Liability Insurance.- 8. Conclusion. | The book examines how the absence of insurance in the past led to some special maritime liability law principles such as ‘general average’ (i.e., losses or expenses shared by all the parties to a maritime adventure) and the limitation of shipowners’ liability. In the absence of insurance, these principles served the function of insurance mostly for shipowners. As commercial marine insurance is now widely available, these principles have lost their justification and may in fact interfere with the most important goal of liability law i.e., deterrence from negligence. The work thus recommends their abolition. It further argues that when insurance is easily available and affordable to the both parties to a liability claim, the main goal of liability law should be deterrence as opposed to compensation. This is exactly the case with the maritime cargo liability claims where both cargo owners and shipowners are invariably insured. As a result, the sole focus of cargo liability law should be and to a great extent, is deterrence. On the other hand in the vessel-source oil pollution liability setting, pollution victims are not usually insured. Therefore oil pollution liability law has to cater both for compensation and deterrence, the two traditional goals of liability law. The final question the work addresses is whether the deterrent effect of liability law is affected by the availability of liability insurance. Contrary to the popular belief the work attempts to prove that the presence of liability insurance is not necessarily a hindrance but can be a complementary force towards the realization of deterrent goal of liability law. | <p>First examination of maritime liability law using a formal economic analysis approach<br>Explores the connection between insurance and maritime liability law<br>Argues that liability insurance is not a hindrance but a complementary force towards achieving the deterrent goal of liability law</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-90-6704-932-0 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], Australian National University, Canberra, ACT, Australia; [NAME], The Australian National University, Canberra, ACT, Australia | New Technologies and the Law of Armed Conflict |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 263 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 263 p. 1 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Law | Sources and Subjects of International Law, International Organizations | SCR19010 | LBB | Legal Aspects of Computing | SCI24059 | UBL | Law | Contributed volume | T.M.C. Asser Press | In production | 2013-11-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction: Conundrum of New Technologies in the Law of Armed Conflict.- The Legal Challenges of New Technologies: An Overview.- Ethical Challenges of New Military Technologies.- Legal Review of New Technology Weapons.- Where Do Cyber Hostilities Fit in the International Law Maze? Geography, Territory and Sovereignty in Cyber Warfare.- Military Strategic Use of Outer Space.- The Law Applicable to Military Strategic Use of Outer Space.- Nanotechnology and the Law of Armed Conflict.- Anticipating the Biological Proliferation Threat of Nanotechnology: Challenges for international Arms Control Regimes.- Nanotechnology and Military Attacks on Photosynthesis.- Unmanned Aerial Vehicles: Do They Pose Legal Challenges? Examining Autonomous Weapon Systems from a Law of Armed Conflict Perspective.- Unmanned Naval Vehicles and the Law of Naval Warfare.- Conclusion: Challenges of New Technologies for the Law of Armed Conflict. | Modern technological development has been both rapid and fundamentally transformative of the means and methods of warfare, and of the broader environment in which warfare is conducted. In many cases, technological development has been stimulated by, and dedicated to, addressing military requirements. On other occasions, technological developments outside the military sphere affect or inform the conduct of warfare and military expectations. The introduction of new technologies such as information technology, space technologies, nanotechnology and robotic technologies into our civil life, and into warfare, is expected to influence the application and interpretation of the existing rules of the law of armed conflict. In this book, scholars and practitioners working in the fields critically examine the potential legal challenges arising from the use of new technologies and future directions of legal development in light of the specific characteristics and challenges each technology presents with regard to foreseeable humanitarian impacts upon the battlespace. | <p>Clarifies how the existing rules of the law of armed conflict are to be applied and interpreted in light of the specific characteristics and challenges new technologies presents</p><p>Supplies up-to-date information about what is possible with new technologies and what is the future direction of those new technologies in warfare</p><p>Provides further insight into remaining concerns, challenges and new ideas</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7950-1 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Baltimore, Baltimore, MD, USA | Precedent in the United States Supreme Court |  | Ius Gentium: Comparative Perspectives on [NAME] and Justice | 33 | 1 | 2014 | 246 | Hard cover | Book | X, 246 p. 3 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Law | Constitutional Law | SCR17028 | LND | Philosophy of Law | SCE27000 | LAB | Law | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Contributors.- Introduction; [NAME] 1 The Dialectic of Stare Decisis Doctrine; [NAME] Starger.- 2 Did Casey Strike Out? Following and Overruling Constitutional Precedents in the Supreme Court; [NAME] Alexander.- 3 An Epistemic Defense of Precedent; [NAME] Hellman.- 4 Private-Rights Litigation and the Normative Foundations of Durable Constitutional Precedent ; [NAME] 5 Group Formation and Precedent; [NAME] Devins.- 6 Stare Decisis and the Selection Effect; [NAME] Schauer.- 7 Methodological Stare Decisis and Constitutional Interpretation; [NAME] 8 Constitutional Method and the Path of Precedent; [NAME] 9 Originalism, Stare Decisis, and Constitutional Authority; [NAME]. | This volume presents a variety of both normative and descriptive perspectives on the use of precedent by the United States Supreme Court. It brings together a diverse group of American legal scholars, some of whom have been influenced by the Segal/Spaeth 'attitudinal' model and some of whom have not. The group of contributors includes legal theorists and empiricists, constitutional lawyers and legal generalists, leading authorities and up-and-coming scholars. The book addresses questions such as how the Court establishes durable precedent, how the Court decides to overrule precedent, the effects of precedent on case selection, the scope of constitutional precedent, the influence of concurrences and dissents, and the normative foundations of constitutional precedent. Most of these questions have been addressed by the Court itself only obliquely, if at all. The volume will be valuable to readers both in the United States and abroad, particularly in light of ongoing debates over the role of precedent in civil-law nations and emerging legal systems. | <p>A diversity of scholarly perspectives provides an unique overview of important Supreme Court precedent</p><p>Contributions by top legal scholars makes this the "go-to" reference on the topic</p><p>Provides a comparative framework for debates about precedent in civil-law and emerging legal systems</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03565-9 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Lisbon, , Portugal | Ethics of Human Rights |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 617 | Hard cover | Book | I, 617 p. | 0 | final | 239 | Law | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | Ethics | SCE14000 | HPQ | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  | worldwide | Acknowledgments.- Acronyms.- Preliminary Observations.- Table of Contents.- Part I – Ethics and Human Rights.- 1. Introduction.- 2. Overview of Ethical Thought.- 3. Historical and Theoretical Rising of Human Rights and Their International Codification and Protection.-  Part II – Human Rights: Common Ethics of Humankind.- 4. Ethics of Recognition.- 5. Human Dignity Principle.- 6. Other Principles.- Part III – Human Rights Revolution.- 7. A Changed and Changing Legal Landscape.- 8. Answering Some Questions.- 9. Conclusion.- Appendices.- [NAME] to Human Rights.- A Chronology of Human Rights.- Summary.- Selected Bibliography.- Whole References.- Index. | This volume focuses on the ethical significance of human rights, aiming at contributing to a universal culture of human rights with deep roots and wide horizons. Its purpose, scope and rationale are reflected in the three-part structure of the manuscript. Part I has a broad introductory historical, theoretical and legal character. Part II submits that an Ethics of Human Rights is best understood as an Ethics of Recognition of human worth, dignity and rights. Moreover, it is argued that human worth consists in the perfectibility of the human species, rooted in its semiotic nature, to be accomplished through the perfecting of human beings, for which the right to education is key. In Part III, the main legal and political outcomes of the Human Rights Revolution are described and answers to the most lasting and common criticisms of human rights are provided. To conclude, the human stature of the Big Five drafters of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights is profiled and the priority that should be recognized to human rights education is highlighted. Some appendices supplement the manuscript. While making a case for the high value and liberating power of the idea and ideal of human rights, objections, controversies and uncertainties are not at all overlooked and emerging issues are explored. The diversity of content of this volume meets many needs of the typical syllabus for a human rights course. | <p>Provides a global, trans-disciplinary approach to the ethical meaning of human rights</p><p>Includes an original human dignity account</p><p>Answers the most common questions and objections concerning human rights</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7941-9 | Law | Rivera | [NAME], [NAME], (C1015ABP), Argentina | The Scope and Structure of Civil Codes |  | Ius Gentium: Comparative Perspectives on [NAME] and Justice | 32 | 1 | 2014 | 452 | Hard cover | Book | VIII, 452 p. | 0 | final | 179 | Law | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | Philosophy of Law | SCE27000 | LAB | Law | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Aknwoledgements.- Table of Contents.- Part One.- The Scope and Structure of Civil Codes – Relations with Commercial Law, Family Law, Consumer Law and Private International Law - A Comparative Approach; [NAME] Rivera.- Part Two.- Argentina - Argentina on the Eve of a New Civil and Commercial Code; [NAME] Medina.- Belgium - Private Law Codifications in Belgium; [NAME] and [NAME] China - Codification in China: the Special Case of Macau; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and Tong Io Cheng.- Czech Republic - Recodification of Private Law in the Czech Republic; [NAME], [NAME] and Monika Pauknerová.- Estonia - Codification of Private Law in Estonia; Irene Kull.- Finland - Finnish Private Law: Statutory System Without a Civil Code; Teemu Juutilainen.- France - French Law; [NAME], [NAME]-Sebastien.- Greece - The Greek Civil Code Facing the Process of Decodification and Recodification of Law; [NAME] Israel - Private Law Codification in a Mixed Legal System – the Israeli Successful Experience; Eyal Zamir.- Italy - A Civil Code Originated During the War (the Italian codice civile); [NAME] Sacco.- Japan - Codification, Decodification, and Recodification of the Japanese Civil Code; Hiroyasu ISHIKAWA.- Netherlands - A Matter of Honour, in Which a Small People an be Great - The Dutch Codification Efforts in Brief; [NAME] Berlee.- Portugal - The Scope and Structure of the Portuguese Civil Code; [NAME] Vicente.- Puerto Rico - Some Personal Observations on Codification in Puerto Rico; [NAME] Argüelles.- Scotland - Mixed but not Codified: the Case of Scotland; [NAME] Is it Possible for a Minor Code of the XIXth Century to Serve as a Model in the XXIst Century?; [NAME] Cantero.- Turkey - The Scope and Structure of Civil Codes-the Turkish Experience; Ergun Özsunay.- United States of America - Costs of No Codes; [NAME] of America, State of Louisiana - Private Law in Louisiana: An Account of Civil Codes, Heritage, and [NAME]; Agustín Parise.- Venezuela - Codification in Venezuela; [NAME] and Claudia Madrid Martínez.- About the Authors.- Index. | This detailed analysis of the content and configuration of civil codes in diverse jurisdictions also examines their relationship with some branches of private law as: family law, commercial law, consumer law and private international law. It analyzes the codification, decodification and recodification processes illuminating the dialogue between current codes – and private law legislation in general – with Constitutions and International Conventions.The commentary elucidates the changing requirements of civil law as it shifted from an early protection of patrimony to a support for commercial and contractual law. It also explains the varying trajectories of civil law, which in some jurisdictions was merged with religious legal tenets in its codification of familial relations, while in others it was fused with commercial law or, indeed, codified from scratch as a discrete legal corpus. Elsewhere, the volume provides material on differing approaches to consumer law, where relevant legislation may be scattered across numerous statutes, and also on private international law, a topic of increasing relevance in a world where business corporations have interests in multiple jurisdictions (and often play one off against another).The volume features invited contributions from leading scholars in the field of private law brought together for an in depth analysis of the current regulatory attitude in this field of the law in jurisdictions with diverse legal systems and traditions. In current times we are witnessing the adoption of diverging regulatory solutions. Through the analysis of the past and present of private law regulation, the volume unveils the underlying trends and relevance of the codification method across the world. | <p>The only book to analyse in depth the trends in private law regulation</p><p>A unique comparative perspective on the past, present and future of private law regulation </p><p>Includes analysis by private law scholars from across the globe </p><p>Defines key elements of differing national legal systems</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02569-8 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Messina, Messina, Italy | Transnational Evidence and Multicultural Inquiries in Europe | Developments in EU Legislation and New Challenges for Human Rights-oriented Criminal Investigations in Cross-border Cases |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 10 | Hard cover | Book | CCXXXII, 10 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Law | [NAME] | SCR20000 | LB | International Criminal Law | SCR19040 | LBBZ | Law | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Current Perspectives in EU Legislation.- The European Investigation Order: A Step Forward Towards a European Cross-border Investigative Procedure?.- Critical Analysis of the EIO Initiative: General Issues.- Critical Analysis of the EIO Initiative: Specific Issues.- Cross-border Criminal Inquiries in Europe: Solution Models and Human Rights Challenges. | This book deals with the gathering of evidence in cross-border investigations in Europe. The issue of obtaining evidence in and from European countries has been among the most debated issues of EU cross-border cooperation in criminal matters over the last two decades, going through periods of intensive discussions and showing an extraordinary adaptability to the evolution of EU legislation for criminal matters. On the other hand, the prosecution and investigations of cross-border cases pose unprecedented challenges in the European scenario, characterized by the increasing flow and activity of citizens over the territory of more than one country and therefore by the need to lay the foundations of a transcultural criminal justice system.The book analyses this complex topic starting with the current perspectives of EU legislation, thus providing a critical analysis of the legislative initiative aimed at introducing a new tool for gathering almost any type of evidence in other Member States, i.e., the European Investigation Order. On a second level, this study deals with the solution models and human rights challenges posed by the increasingly intensive dialogues between domestic and supranational case laws, and formulates essential guidelines for setting up a fair transnational enquiry system in Europe. | <p>Updated analysis of the developments in Europe </p><p>Multilevel diagnosis (research models, analysis of legislation and case law) </p><p>Balanced combination of theoretical reconstruction and proposals for future legislation ​</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03442-3 | Law | Uzelac | [NAME], Faculty of Law, Zagreb, Croatia | Goals of Civil Justice and Civil Procedure in Contemporary Judicial Systems |  | Ius Gentium: Comparative Perspectives on [NAME] and Justice | 34 | 1 | 2014 | 275 | Hard cover | Book | X, 275 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Law | Civil Procedure Law | SCR12034 | LNAC | Political Science, general | SCX18000 | JPA | Law | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Table of Contents.- Part I General Synthesis.- Chapter 1 Goals of Civil Justice and Civil Procedure in the Contemporary World  Global Developments – Towards Harmonisation (and Back); [NAME] National Perspectives.- Chapter 2 Civil Justice in Austrian-German Tradition; Christian Koller.- Chapter 3 Civil Justice in Pursuit of Efficiency; [NAME] Chapter 4 Goals of Civil Justice When Nothing Works: The Case of Italy; Elisabetta Silvestri.- Chapter 5 Goals of Civil Justice in Norway: Readiness for a Pragmatic Reform; [NAME] Backer.- Chapter 6 ‘American Exceptionalism’ in Goals for Civil Litigation; [NAME] 7 Civil Justice with Multiple Objectives The Unique Path of Hong Kong’s Civil Justice Reform; [NAME] and [NAME] Chan.- Chapter 8 Social Harmony at the Cost of Trust Crisis: Goals of Civil Justice in China’; Yulin Fu.- Chapter 9 Civil Litigation in Russia: ‘Guided Justice’ and Revival of Public Interest; [NAME] Nokhrin.- Chapter 10 Battle between Individual Rights and Public Interest in Hungarian Civil Procedure; [NAME] and Gergely Czoboly.- Chapter 11 (In)compatibility of Procedural Preclusions with the Goals of Civil Justice: An Ongoing Debate in Slovenia; [NAME] Galič.- Chapter 12 Judicial Activism as Goals Setting – Civil Justice in Brazil; [NAME] Alvim Wambier.- List of Contributors. | This book is a collection of papers that address a fundamental question: What is the role of civil justice and civil procedure in the various national traditions in the contemporary world? The book presents striking differences among a range of countries and legal traditions, but also points to common trends and open issues. It brings together prominent experts, professionals and scholars from both civil and common law jurisdictions. It represents all main legal traditions ranging from Europe (Germanic and Romanic countries, Scandinavia, ex-Socialist countries) and Russia to the Americas (North and South) and China (Mainland and Hong Kong). While addressing the main issue – the goals of civil justice – the book discusses the most topical concerns regarding the functioning and efficiency of national systems of civil justice. These include concerns such as finding the appropriate balance between accurate fact-finding and the right to a fair trial within a reasonable time, the processing of hard cases and the function of civil justice as a specific public service. In the mosaic of contrasts and oppositions special place is devoted to the continuing battle between the individualistic/liberal approach and the collectivist/paternalistic approach – the battle in which, seemingly, paternalistic tendencies regain momentum in a number of contemporary justice systems. | <p>Offers a unique collection of comparative insights into the social role and function of civil courts</p><p>Includes contributions of prominent legal scholars and practitioners from all globally important legal traditions</p><p>Addresses the most topical concerns regarding the functioning and efficiency of national systems of civil justice</p><p>Provides the best introductory overview of global justice systems and their role</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-45093-8 | Law | Vadi | Valentina Vadi, Maastricht University, Maastricht, The Netherlands; [NAME], Maastricht University, Maastricht, The Netherlands | Art, Cultural Heritage and the Market | Ethical and Legal Issues |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 366 | Hard cover | Book | X, 366 p. | 0 | final | 179 | Law | International Economic Law, Trade Law | [NAME] | LBBM | Cultural Heritage | SCV35000 | JFC | Law | Contributed volume | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Art, Cultural Heritage and the Market: Legal and Ethical Issues.- 2. Reparation Art – Finding [NAME] in the Resolution of Disputes on Russian War Spoils and Nazi-Looted Art.- 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution in Art Claims: Arbitration and Mediation in Restitution Claims by the Dutch Restitutions Committee.- 4. Alternative Dispute Resolution Mechanisms in Cultural Property Related Disputes: UNESCO Mediation and Conciliation Procedure.- 5. Protecting Cultural Objects: Enforcing the Illicit Export of Foreign Cultural Objects.- 6. The Perils of Buying and Selling Art at the Fair: Legal Issues in Title.- 7. How to break the Deadlock in the Debate about Colonial Acquisitions?.- 8. Repatriation and Multilevel Heritage Legislation in Canada and Australia: A Comparative Analysis of the Challenges in Repatriating Religious Artefacts to Indigenous Communities.- 9. The Underwater Heritage of the Riace Bronzes: Ethics and the Art Market in Ancient Rome and Today.- 10. Underwater Cultural Heritage and the Market: The Uncertain Destiny of [NAME] under International Law.- 11. Collectible – The Social and Ethical Implications Surrounding the Collected Object.- 12. The Art of the Sale: Museums and Deaccessioning.- 13. The Implementation on the Resale Right Directive in Germany and the United Kingdom.- 14. Art Exchange? How the International Art Market lacks a Clear Regulatory Framework. | In the age of economic globalisation, do art and heritage matter? Once the domain of elitist practitioners and scholars, the governance of cultural heritage and the destiny of iconic artefacts have emerged as the new frontier of international law, making headlines and attracting the varied interests of academics and policy-makers, museum curators and collectors, human rights activists and investment lawyers and artists and economists, just to mention a few. The return of cultural artefacts to their legitimate owners, the recovery of underwater cultural heritage and the protection and promotion of artistic expressions are just some of the pressing issues addressed by this book.Contemporary intersections between art, cultural heritage and the market are complicated by a variety of ethical and legal issues, which often describe complex global relations. Should works of art be treated differently from other goods? What happens if a work of art, currently exhibited in a museum, turns out to have originally been looted? What is the relevant legal framework? What should be done with ancient shipwrecks filled with objects from former colonies? Should such objects be kept by the finders? Should they be returned to the country of origin? This book addresses these different questions while highlighting the complex interplay between legal and ethical issues in the context of cultural governance. The approach is mainly legal but interdisciplinary aspects are considered as well. | <p>Addresses current developments concerning the art market, its legal and ethical aspects and key challenges</p><p>Provides a multi-disciplinary analysis </p><p>Focuses on the restitution of cultural property and dispute settlement </p><p>Written by authors from a wide array of backgrounds</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03445-4 | Law | Wang | [NAME], National Taiwan University, Taipei, Taiwan | Codification in East Asia | Selected Papers from the 2nd IACL Thematic Conference | Ius Comparatum - Global Studies in Comparative Law | 2 | 1 | 2014 | 255 | Hard cover | Book | I, 255 p. 10 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Law | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | [NAME] | SCR1200X | LAFD | Law | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction; [NAME] Preface; [NAME] About the authors.- Part I Codification in Context.- The Defining Characteristics of the Legal Family of East Asia; [NAME] and Yen-Lin Agnes Chiu.- Codification in the 21st Century: A View from Korea; [NAME] II Codification and [NAME] in East Asia: International Perspectives.- Codification and Decodification: the State of Civil and Commercial Codes in Indonesia; [NAME] Law Codification in East Asia today: Japanese and Indian Examples; [NAME] Halpérin.- Part III Codification on Commercial Law.- General Perspectives; [NAME] Kim.- National Perspectives - China; [NAME], [NAME] and Zhenxing Zhang.- National Perspectives - China; [NAME] jianbo.- National Perspectives - Hong Kong (China); [NAME] National Perspectives - Japan; Tomotaka Fujita.- National Perspectives - Taiwan; Ming-Jye Hunag and Wang-Ruu Tseng.- Part IV Codification on Administrative Law.- General Perspectives; Ryuji Yamamoto.- National Perspectives - China; [NAME] National Perspectives - Japan; Junko_IIJIMA.- National Perspectives - Korea; Heo [NAME] Wook.- National Perspectives.- Taiwan; [NAME] Lee.- Part V Codification on Civil Law.- General Perspectives; Yeong-ching Su.- National Perspectives - China; Shi-yuan Han.- Part VI Codification on Private International Law.- General Perspectives; [NAME] and Zhengxin Huo.- National Perspectives - Taiwan; [NAME]. | This book looks at codification from a broad, international perspective, discussing general themes as well as various legal fields. Since codification is a subject of intense current interest in East Asia, this second volume on codification is dedicated to the sub-theme of codification and legal transplant in this area, focusing on China, Japan, Korea and Taiwan. It includes two papers that discuss development of codification in East Asia and Korea in particular. It is also comprised of two reports that draw comparative lessons from Japan, India and Indonesia. In addition, this volume consists of four general reports and 19 national reports that guide readers through the knowledge of codification of commercial law, administrative law, civil law and private international law in East Asia.This book is developed from papers presented at the 2012 Thematic Conference of the International Academy of Comparative Law. | <p>Provides comprehensive and insightful knowledge about codification in East Asia</p><p>Offers excellent insights into East Asian perspectives from regionally representative scholars</p><p>A "must have" for any scholar wishing to keep abreast of major legal trends in East Asia​</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03454-6 | Law | Wang | [NAME], National Taiwan University, Taipei, Taiwan | Codification in International Perspective | Selected Papers from the 2nd IACL Thematic Conference | Ius Comparatum - Global Studies in Comparative Law | 1 | 1 | 2014 | 432 | Hard cover | Book | I, 432 p. | 0 | final | 179 | Law | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | [NAME] | SCR1200X | LAFD | Law | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction; [NAME] Preface; [NAME] About the Authors.- Part I Codification: from a Broader Perspective.- Codification, Decodification and Recodification: History, Politics and Procedure; Whitmore Gray.- Codification: The Civilian Experience Reconsidered on the Eve of a Common European Sales Law; Reinhard Zimmermann.- Part II Soft Codification of Private Law.- Supranational Codification of Private Law in Europe and Its Significance for Third States; [NAME] The Soft Codification of the Unidroit Principles of International Commercial Contracts: Process and Outcome; [NAME]-fa Lo.- Restatements and Non-State Codifications of Private Law; [NAME] Demott.- Part III Codification of Private Law in Post-Soviet Times.- Codification in the 21st century; [NAME] Chanturia.-  Private Law Codification in the Republic of Croatia; Tatjana Josipović.- Codification of Private Law in Post-Soviet Times; [NAME] Part IV Codification of Administrative Procedure.- Codification of the Law of Administrative Procedure General Perspectives; [NAME] Beyond the Nation State.- Model penal code and the codification dilemma in the US; [NAME] Thaman.- Part VI Codification of Human Rights.- Codification of Human Rights at National and International Levels General Perspectives; [NAME] Ferrari.- National Perspectives - Finland; [NAME] National Perspectives - Germany; Uwe Kischel.- National Perspectives - Israel; [NAME] and Yonatan Weisbrod.- National Perspectives -Japan; Akiko EJIMA.- National Perspectives - Netherlands; [NAME] and Marthe Lot Vermeulen.- National Perspectives - Portugal; Luísa Neto.- National Perspectives - Romania; Irina Moroianu Zlătescu.- National Perspectives-The United States; [NAME]. | No aspect of legal formalism has interested comparative jurists as much as the extent of legislative codification across legal systems. This book looks at codification from a broad, international perspective, discussing general themes as well as various legal fields. The first of two volumes on this subject begins with a general theoretical and historical view of codification, followed by a series of other horizontal inquiries. It encompasses papers focusing on several significant contemporary issues in codification, including 'codification of private law in post-soviet times', 'criminal law codification beyond the nation state' and 'soft codification of private law'. In addition, this volume consists of general reports and national reports on administrative procedure and human rights, providing a comparative analysis of codification of law.This book is developed from papers presented at the 2012 Thematic Congress of the International Academy of Comparative Law. | <p>Comprehensively covers the story of codification</p><p>Provides insightful knowledge on state of play on codification globally</p><p>Provides excellent material for comparative studies by a globally representative line-up of scholars</p><p>A critical addition to the library of any scholar wishing to keep abreast of major trends in contemporary law</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-23265-7 | Law | Zhang | [NAME], China University of Political Science and Law, Beijing, People's Republic of China | The Tradition and Modern Transition of Chinese Law |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 800 p. | 0 | final | 279 | Law | Theories of Law, Philosophy of Law, Legal History | SCR11011 | LAB |  |  |  | Law | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | I The Tradition of Chinese Law.- To Introduce “Li” (Rites) Into Law And To Integrate “Li” (Rites) with [NAME] as a Standard, to Promote Morality and to [NAME] with Prudence.- [NAME], Duty as a Standard.- Advocating Impartiality, Emphasizing Criminal Law and Neglecting Civil Law.- Following “[NAME]” (Heavenly Principles) and Enforcing Laws According to the Concrete Situations of Specific Cases.- The Law Deriving from Monarch, the Monarchy Power Overtopping Law.- Clan Orientation and The Ethical Rule of Law.- Regulating Official by Law, Defining Duties and Obligations.- Historical Comparison and Timely Adjustment of the Legal System.- Unified Interpretation of Law and Unparalleled Flourishing of “Lv Xue”.- “Zhu Fa Bing Cun” (The Coexistence of Various Laws) and “Min Xing You Fen” (The Differentiation Between Civil and Criminal Laws).- Revising Laws by Legislation and Citing Precedents by “Bi Fu” (Legal Analogy).- Making Convictions by Law and Making Judgments by Analogy.- Pursuing No Litigation, and [NAME] by Mediation.- The Contribution to Chinese Legal System by All Nationalities in China.- II The Modern Transition of Chinese Law.- The Introduction of Western Legal Culture.- The Change of Traditional Legal Concepts.- The Thoughts and Practices of Legal Reform in the Transitional Process.- The Continuing Progress of the Modern Legal Transition During the Period of the Republic of China.- The Historical Value of the Modern Transition of Chinese Law and the Experience for Reference. | The book was first published in 1997, and was awarded the first prize of scientific research by the Ministry of Justice during the ninth Five-Year Plan of China. In 2005, it was adopted the text book for the postgraduates of law majors. In 2009, it was awarded the second prize of the best books on law in China. The book discusses from different aspects the long legal tradition in China, and it not only helps us to have a further understanding of Chinese legal system but also combines theories and practice and illustrate the modern legal transition which probes the history of Chinese legal system.As is known to us all, China is a country with a long legal history, which can be traced back to more than three thousand year ago. So the legal tradition of China has been passed down from generation to generation without any interruptions. This feature is peculiar to Chinese legal history which is beyond all comparison with that of other countries such as ancient Egypt, ancient India, ancient [NAME] and ancient Persia. Through the study of Chinese legal history we can have a deeper understanding of the histories, features, origins and the transition of Chinese legal tradition. The Chinese legal tradition originated from China, and it is the embodiment of the wisdom and creativity of Chinese civilization. The great many books, researching materials, legal constitutions, archives, files and records of different dynasties in China have provided us with rare, complete and systematic materials to research. The book has a complete, systematic and detailed research on Chinese legal tradition and its transition and it gives people a correct recognition of the process of the perfection of laws during its development and its position as well as its value in the social progress in order to grasp its regular patterns. It also has showed us the most valuable part and core of Chinese legal Tradition and it is a summary of Chinese legal tradition and its transition from different perspectives, different angles and different levels. From the book, we can see that the ancient Chinese Legal Culture had once shocked the world and exerted great influence on the civilization of the world legal system, especially the legal systems in Asian countries. The book also has discussed the reestablishment of law in the late Qing Dynasty and the beginning of the Chinese law’s transition to modernity.In a word, the book has not only combined the legal system and the legal culture together, but also integrated the important historical figures and events ingeniously and it is a valuable and readable book with authenticity. | <p>System described the characteristics of ancient Chinese legal tradition</p><p>Thoughtful in-depth discussion of the reasons for the transformation of modern Chinese law and the process </p><p>Reprinted many times in China, received good reputation</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7880-1 | Linguistics | Anchimbe | [NAME], University of Bayreuth, Bayreuth, Germany | Structural and Sociolinguistic Perspectives on Indigenisation | On Multilingualism and Language Evolution |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 213 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 213 p. 13 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Linguistics | Sociolinguistics | SCN44000 | CFB | African Languages | SCN11000 | 2H | Linguistics | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- 1. Indigenisation and multilingualism: Extending the debate on language evolution in Cameroon.- Part I: Structural perspectives on indigenisation – Syntax and phonology. 2. ‘That-clauses’ in Cameroon English: A study in functional extension. 3. [NAME]-like usage in Cameroon English: The case of copy, resumptive, obligation, and dummy pronouns. 4. Les camerounismes: [NAME] d’une (nouvelle) typologie. 5. Intonation in Cameroon English. 6. Ethnolinguistic heterogeneity in Cameroon English pronunciation.- Part II: Sociolinguistic perspectives on indigenisation – Sociolinguistics and pragmatics. 7. Attitudes towards Cameroon English: A sociolinguistic survey. 8. [NAME] and the use of tags in Cameroon English discourse. 9.Ethnicité, politesse et représentations au Cameroun. 10. Address strategies in Cameroon Pidgin English: A socio-pragmatic perspective.- Author/Subject index. | Descriptions of new varieties of European languages in postcolonial contexts have focused exceedingly on system-based indigenisation and variation. This volume–while further illustrating processes and instantiations of indigenisation at this level–incorporates investigations of sociolinguistic and pragmatic phenomena in daily social interaction–e.g. politeness, respect, compliment response, naming and address forms, and gender–through innovative analytic frameworks that view indigenisation from emic perspectives. Focusing on postcolonial Cameroon and using natural and questionnaire data, the book assesses the salience of linguistic and sociocultural hybridisation triggered by colonialism and, recently, globalisation in interaction in and across languages and cultures. The authors illustrate how the multilingual nature of the society and individuals’ multilingual repertoires shape patterns in the indigenisation and evolution of the ex-colonial languages, English and French, and [NAME]. | <p>Focuses on the pragmatics of new indigenized varieties where previous research only deals with lexical, semantic, and phonological properties</p><p>Provides and uses authentic data from naturally occurring situations which makes the findings more generalisable to other postcolonial multilingual communities</p><p>Offers rare insights from French as well as English as a post-colonial language</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-41362-9 | Linguistics | Xiao | [NAME], Lancaster University, Lancaster, UK | Corpus-Based Studies of Translational Chinese in English-Chinese Translation |  | New Frontiers in Translation Studies |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 220 p. 65 illus. | 0 | approx. | 139 | Linguistics | Translation | SCN47000 | CFP | Linguistics (general) | SCN00000 | CBX | Linguistics | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | Planned | 2014-02-17 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Corpus-based Translation Studies: A new paradigm of translation studies.- The state of the art of research into translational language.- Methodology: The corpora and tools used.- Macro-statistic features of translational Chinese.- Lexical features of translational Chinese.- Grammatical features of translational Chinese.- Implications of the features of translational Chinese for translation universal research.- Conclusion.- References. | This book takes a corpus-based approach, which integrates translation studies and contrastive analysis, to the study of translational language. It presents the world’s first balanced corpus of translational Chinese, which, in combination with a comparable native Chinese corpus, provides a reliable empirical basis for a comprehensive account of the macro-statistic, lexical, and grammatical features of translational Chinese in English-to-Chinese translation – a significant contribution to Descriptive Translation Studies. The research findings based on these two distinctly different languages have important implications for universal translation research on the European tradition. | <p>The first book-length, comprehensive account of translational Chinese</p><p><p>An in-depth investigation into universal translation hypotheses</p><p><p>An excellent demonstration of using corpora in translation studies</p><p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03430-0 | Philosophy | Ahonen | [NAME], University of Helsinki, Helsinki, Finland | Mental Disorders in Ancient Philosophy |  | Studies in the History of Philosophy of Mind | 13 | 1 | 2014 | 353 | Hard cover | Book | I, 353 p. 1 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Philosophy | Philosophy of Mind | SCE31000 | [NAME] | Cognitive Psychology | SCY20060 | JMR | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Chapter 1. Medical and Cultural Background.- Chapter 2. Plato on madness and mental disorders.- Chapter 3. The Aristotelian concept of mental disorders.- Chapter 4. The Stoics on the kinds of madness.- Chapter 5. Galen on the diseases of the mind and soul.- Chapter 6. Other philosophical traditions.- [NAME] and Caelius Aurelianus on [NAME] as mental patients in ancient tradition. | This book offers a comprehensive study of the views of ancient philosophers on mental disorders. Relying on the original Greek and Latin textual sources, the author describes and analyses how the ancient philosophers explained mental illness and its symptoms, including hallucinations, delusions, strange fears and inappropriate moods and how they accounted for the respective roles of body and mind in such disorders. Also considered are ethical questions relating to mental illness, approaches to treatment and the position of mentally ill people in societies of the times.The volume opens with a historical overview that examines ancient medical accounts of mental illness, from Hippocrates' famous Sacred Disease to late antiquity medical authors. Separate chapters interpret in detail the writings of Plato, Aristotle, [NAME] and the Stoics and a final chapter summarises the views of various strains of Scepticism, the Epicurean school and the Middle and Neo-Platonists.Offering an important and useful contribution to the study of ancient philosophy, psychology and medicine. This volume sheds new light on the history of mental illness and presents a new angle on ancient philosophical psychology. | <p>First extensive study into ancient philosophical understanding of mental disorders</p><p>Draws on original Greek and Latin textual sources to probe the views of ancient philosophers</p><p>Considers in context the ancient concepts of mania, melancholy, delusion and hallucination</p><p>Includes chapters on the views of Plato, Aristotle, [NAME] and the Stoics</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7977-8 | Philosophy | Akiba | [NAME], Virginia Commonwealth University, Richmond, VA, USA; [NAME], University of Lille III, [NAME], France | Vague Objects and Vague Identity | New Essays on Ontic Vagueness | Logic, Epistemology, and the Unity of Science | 33 | 1 | 2014 | 365 | Hard cover | Book | V, 365 p. | 0 | final | 179 | Philosophy | Philosophy | SCE00003 | HP | Logic | SCE16000 | HPL | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface; [NAME] and Ali Abasnezhad.- Introduction; [NAME] 1. Mereological Vagueness.- Mereological indeterminacy: metaphysical but not fundamental; [NAME] Sattig.- A linguistic account of mereological vagueness; [NAME] Donnelly.- Part 2. Varieties of Ontic Vagueness.- Vague objects in quantum mechanics?; [NAME] persons; Kristie Miller.- Indiscriminable but not identical looks: non-vague phenomenal predicates and phenomenal properties; [NAME], supervaluations and vagueness in the world; [NAME] Pinillos.- Part 3. Formal Issues.- Boolean-valued sets as vague sets; [NAME] Akiba.- One bald man.. two bald men.. three bald men, aahh aahh aahh aahh aaaahhhh!; [NAME] and abstraction; [NAME] Shapiro.- Part 4. Ontic Supervaluationism.- Vagueness in the world: a supervaluationist approach; [NAME] and [NAME] Hosseini.- What could vague objects possibly be?; [NAME] Part 5. Vague Identity.- Some comments on Evans’s proof; [NAME] Garrett.- Vague existence implies vague identity; [NAME] built on clouds: vague identity and vague objects; [NAME] and [NAME] Noonan.- Evans tolerated; [NAME]. | This unique anthology of new, contributed essays offers a range of perspectives on various aspects of ontic vagueness. It seeks to answer core questions pertaining to onticism, the view that vagueness exists in the world itself. The questions to be addressed include whether vague objects must have vague identity, and whether ontic vagueness has a distinctive logic, one that is not shared by semantic or epistemic vagueness. The essays in this volume explain the motivations behind onticism, such as the plausibility of mereological vagueness and indeterminacy in quantum mechanics and they offer various arguments both for and against ontic vagueness; onticism is also compared with other, competing theories of vagueness such as semanticism, the view that vagueness exists only in our linguistic representation of the world.[NAME] influential paper of 1978, “Can There Be Vague Objects?” gave a simple but cogent argument against the coherence of ontic vagueness. Onticism was subsequently dismissed by many. However, in recent years, researchers have become aware of the logical gaps in Evans’s argument and this has triggered a new wave of interest in onticism. Onticism is now widely regarded as at least a coherent view. Reflecting this growing consensus, the present anthology for the first time puts together essays that are focused on onticism and its various facets and it fills in the lacuna in the literature on vagueness, a much-discussed subject in contemporary philosophy. | <p>An original contribution to the literature and offers explanations to well known issues in onticism, vague identities and other important questions</p><p>Features work by renowned authorities from a variety of areas related to the field</p><p>Syncretic collection of diverse papers offering essential specialist analysis</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02797-5 | Philosophy | Albeverio | [NAME], Universität Bonn, Bonn, Germany; [NAME], Universität Bielefeld, Bielefeld, Germany | Direction of Time |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 294 | Hard cover | Book | XXXIV, 294 p. 24 illus. | 0 | final | 179 | Science, general | History of Science | SCA12000 | PDX | Theoretical, Mathematical and Computational Physics | SCP19005 | PHU | General Science | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Models of time.- On Abuse of Time-metaphors.- The Direction of Time, The Role of Reversibility/Irreversibility in the Study of Nature.- The Arrow of Time and Information Theory.- ASYMMETRIES, IRREVERSIBILITY, AND DYNAMICS OF TIME1.- IS TIME REAL?.- Is time directed?.- On the different aspects of time in the fundamental theories of physics.- Quantum Events and Irreversibility.- Time in modern philosophy of physics { a survey.- THE DIRECTION OF TIME IN DYNAMICAL SYSTEMS.- Physics and Our Intuitive Outlook on Time.- The philosophical significance of the relativistic conception of time.- The Direction of Time in Quantum Mechanics.- GEOMETRY OF PSYCHOLOGICAL TIME.- A Computer’s Arrow of Time.- Two-way thermodynamics: Could it really happen?.- Where to Put It? The Direction of Time Between Axioms and Supplementary Conditions.- A Simple Model for Decoherence.- Two Arrows of Time in Nonlocal Particle Dynamics.- Boundary conditions, time reversal and [NAME] on the Compatibility of Opposite Arrows of Time.- [NAME] on the Compatibility of Opposite Arrows of Time II1. | This edited book presents the problems of time and direction from an interdisciplinary point of view, concentrating in particular on the following relations:• Time and physics • Time, philosophy and psychology • Time, mathematics and information theoryIt is a unique contribution by philosophers and scientists who are active in mathematics, physics, biology, engineering, information theory and psychology. Questions such as the existence of a Big Bang, the neurobiological basis regarding the coexistence of free will and determinism, intercultural aspects of time, mathematical models of time, psychopathological features of time, and micro reversibility versus macroscopic irreversibility are studied. It also provides a truly interdisciplinary study of the problematic 'arrow of time'. | <p>Provides a thorough introduction to the problem of time as a linear concept</p><p>Provides a broad cultural study on time, with philosophical, religious and scientific viewpoints</p><p>Contains a unique interdisciplinary approach</p><p>Will be of interest to humanity students, as well as social and natural science students</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4471-5618-5 | Philosophy | Barbut | [NAME], (deceased), Professor [NAME] wrote this while at EHESS, Paris, France; [NAME], [NAME], Paris, France; [NAME], [NAME] et [NAME], Paris, France | [NAME] and [NAME] | 50 Years of Correspondence in 107 Letters | Sources and Studies in the History of Mathematics and Physical Sciences |  | 1 | 2014 | 213 | Hard cover | Book | XVII, 213 p. 14 illus., 2 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 69.99 | Science, general | History of Science | SCA12000 | PDX | Probability Theory and Stochastic Processes | SCM27004 | PBT | General Science | Graduate/advanced undergraduate textbook | Springer London | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Introduction to the correspondence.- 107 Letters from [NAME] to [NAME]. | The fascinating correspondence between [NAME] and [NAME] spans an extremely active period in French mathematics during the twentieth century. The letters of these two Frenchmen show their vicissitudes of research and passionate enthusiasm for the emerging field of modern probability theory. The letters cover various topics of mathematical importance including academic careers and professional travels, issues concerning students and committees, and the difficulties both mathematicians met to be elected to the Paris Academy of Sciences.The technical questions that occupied [NAME] and Fréchet on almost a daily basis are the primary focus of these letters, which are charged with elation, frustration and humour. Their mathematical victories and setbacks unfolded against the dramatic backdrop of the two World Wars and the occupation of France, during which [NAME] was obliged to go into hiding. The clear and persistent desire of these mathematicians to continue their work whatever the circumstance testifies to the enlightened spirit of their discipline which was persistent against all odds.The book contains a detailed and comprehensive introduction to the central topics of the correspondence. The original text of the letters is also annotated by numerous footnotes for helpful guidance. [NAME] and [NAME] will be useful to anybody interested in the history of mathematics in the twentieth century and, in particular, the birth of modern probability theory. | <p>Provides a thorough study of the birth of modern probability theory</p><p>Provides lively and profound portraits of [NAME] and [NAME] Fréchet</p><p>Gives an insight into mathematical life during twentieth-century France</p> | Students | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11649 | Mathematics and Statistics
 | 978-94-007-5121-7 | Philosophy | Bernard | Alain Bernard, [NAME] UMR 8560 and ESPE, Paris, France; [NAME], Université Paris 7 - CNRS, Paris, France | Scientific Sources and Teaching Contexts Throughout History: Problems and Perspectives |  | Boston Studies in the Philosophy and History of Science | 301 | 1 | 2014 | 334 | Hard cover | Book | IX, 334 p. 227 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Science, general | History of Science | SCA12000 | PDX | Epistemology | SCE13000 | HPK | General Science | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | Available | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 | 2013-11-26 00:00:00 |  | Contributors.- General Introduction; Alain Bernard and Christine Proust.- Part I: Holistic Approach.- The teaching context and reading from the 16th to the 19th centuries: The role of the memorization of texts in learning; Anne-Marie Chartier.- Teaching and learning medicine and exorcism at Uruk during the Hellenistic period; [NAME] Clancier.- Part II: Critical Approach.- Does a master always write for his students? Some evidence from Old Babylonian scribal schools; [NAME] Proust.- In what sense did Theon’s commentary on the Almagest have a didactic purpose?; Alain Bernard.- Part III: Comparative Approach.- Relationships between French “practical arithmetics” and teaching?; Stéphane Lamassé.- On the transmission of mathematical knowledge in versified form in China; Andrea Bréard.- Mathematical Progress or Mathematical Teaching? Bilingualism and Printing In European Renaissance Mathematics; [NAME] IV: Zooming Approach.- [NAME] and the Liber Abaci. Biographical elements and the project of the work; Eva Caianiello.- Didactical Dimensions of Mathematical Problems: Weighted Distribution in a Vietnamese Mathematical Treatise; Alexei Volkov.- Learning and Teaching Medicine in Late Imperial China; [NAME] Post Face.- On the sources of the historian of science from the perspective of a history of education; [NAME]. | This book examines the textual, social, cultural, practical and institutional environments to which the expression “teaching and learning contexts” refers. It  reflects on the extent to which studying such environments helps us to better understand ancient or modern sources, and how notions of “teaching” and “learning” are to be understood. Tackling two problems: the first, is that of certain sources of scientific knowledge being studied without taking into account the various “contexts” of transmission that gave this knowledge a long-lasting meaning. The second is that other sources are related to teaching and learning activities, but without being too precise and demonstrative about the existence and nature of this “teaching context”. In other words, this book makes clear what is meant by “context” and highlights the complexity of the practice hidden by the words “teaching” and “learning”. Divided into three parts, the book makes accessible teaching and learning situations, presents comparatist approaches, and emphasizes the notion of teaching as projects embedded in coherent treatises or productions. | <p>Offers a new approach to a hitherto neglected subject</p><p>Has a heuristic value and interest for similar studies</p><p>Offers a variety of case studies, belonging to different cultural areas and periods</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7916-7 | Philosophy | Campbell | [NAME], Georgetown University, Washington, DC, USA | Persons, Identity, and Political Theory | A Defense of Rawlsian Political Identity |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 187 | Hard cover | Book | XI, 187 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Philosophy | Political Philosophy | SCE37000 | HPS | Political Theory | SCX18010 | JPA | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | Available | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 | 2013-11-19 00:00:00 |  | Dedication.- Acknowledgments.- Table of Contents.- Chapter 1: Political Identity, Perfectionism and Neutrality.- Chapter 2: Personal Identity and Liberal Political Theory.- Chapter 3: Clarification of the Liberal/Communitarian Debate and Metaphysical Objections to Rawls’s Conception of the Person.- Chapter 4: Taylor’s Conception of Persons and His Theory of Personal Identity.- Chapter 5: Defense of the Original Position.- Chapter 6: Objections to Rawls’s Political Conception of Persons.- Chapter 7: Defense of Rawls’s Political Conception of the Person.- Chapter 8: Rawlsian Political Identity.- Index. | This book examines the conception of the person at work in [NAME] writings from Theory of Justice to Justice as Fairness: A Restatement. The book aims to show that objections to [NAME]’s political conception of the person fail and that a Rawlsian conception of political identity is defensible. The book shows that the debate between liberals and communitarians is relevant to the current debate regarding perfectionism and neutrality in politics, and clarifies the debate between Rawls and communitarians in a way that will promote fruitful discussion on the issue of political identity. It does this by providing a clearer account of a conception of personal identity according to which persons are socially constituted, including the intuitions and assumptions underlying the communitarians’ conception of persons as “socially constituted.” It examines the communitarian objections to liberal political theory and to the liberal conception of persons, the “unencumbered self.” The book differentiates between two types of objection to the liberal conception of persons: the metaphysical and normative. It explains [NAME]'s political conception of persons, and the metaphysical and normative commitments [NAME] incurs—and does not incur—in virtue of that conception. It shows that both kind of objection to [NAME]'s political conception of the person fail. Finally, modifying [NAME]’s political conception of the person, a Rawlsian conception of political identity is explained and defended. | <p>Clarifies and explains the Liberal/Communitarian debate</p><p>Explains the connection between early criticism of [NAME]'s original position and more recent criticisms of liberal notions of political identity</p><p>Explains and clarifies the broader debate regarding the issues discussed in [NAME] book</p><p>More fully explains the reasons that [NAME] and other communitarians have criticized liberal political theorists, [NAME] in particular</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02844-6 | Philosophy | [NAME] | [NAME], Boston University, Boston, MA, USA; [NAME], Chemnitz, Germany | [NAME] Theory and Method in the Social Sciences |  | Boston Studies in the Philosophy and History of Science | 303 | 1 | 2013 | 371 | Hard cover | Book | XI, 371 p. | 0 | final | 179 | Philosophy | Philosophy of Science | SCE34000 | PDA | Philosophy of the Social Sciences | SCE36000 | HPS | Philosophy | Collected works | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Editorial Note.- Introductory Essay - Felix Kaufmann in Perspective; [NAME] and Method in the Social Sciences; [NAME] Kaufmann.- Preface.- Introduction  On the Problematic and Structure of the Book.- Part One  Elements of the General Theory of Science.- 1. Basic Philosophical Considerations.- 2. Logical-mathematical Thought.- 3. Fact and Law.- 4. Life and Consciousness.- 5. The Concept of Value.- 6. Metaphysics and the Theory of Science.- 7. Proposal for a Universal Methodological Schema.- Part Two The Dispute over Method in the Social Sciences (Methodenstreit).- 1. The Social Sciences and the Natural Sciences.- 2. The Social Sciences and Psychology.- 3. [NAME] in the Social Sciences.- 4. The ‘Historical’ in the Social Sciences.- 5. Fundamental Concepts of the Social Sciences.- 6. Social Laws and Ideal Types.- 7. The Way to Overcome the Methodenstreit.- 8. Remarks on the Methodological Controversy [Methodenstreit] over the Theory of Marginal Utility.- 9. The Concept of Positive Law and the Pure Theory of Law.- Annotations.- Index of Names.- Editorial Note.- Introductory Essay Felix Kaufmann in Perspective; [NAME]. Introduction.- 2. Biographical Dates.- 3. [NAME] of Social Science in Vienna between the Wars.- 4. Kaufmann's Positions in Methodology.- 5. A Selection from Interviews and a letter on Kaufmann.- 6. [NAME][NAME] im [NAME]’: a Poem with translation.- 7. Bibliography of Works Cited in the Introductory Essay Felix Kaufmann Theory and Method in the Social Sciences.- Preface.- Introduction  On the Problematic and Structure of the Book.- Part One Elements of the General Theory of Science.- 1. Basic Philosophical Considerations.- 2. Logical-mathematical Thought.- 3. Fact and Law.- 4. Life and Consciousness.- 5. The Concept of Value.- 6. Metaphysics and the Theory of Science.- 7. Proposal for a Universal Methodological Schema.- Part Two The Dispute over Method in the Social Sciences (Methodenstreit).- Preparatory Remarks.- 1. The Social Sciences and the Natural Sciences.- 2. The Social Sciences and Psychology.- 3. [NAME] in the Social Sciences.- 4. The ‘Historical’ in the Social Sciences.- 5. Fundamental Concepts of the Social Sciences.- 6. Social Laws and Ideal Types.- 7. The Way to Overcome the Methodenstreit.- 8. Remarks on the Methodological Controversy [Methodenstreit] over the Theory of Marginal Utility.- 9. The Concept of Positive Law and  the Pure Theory of  Law.- Annotations.- Index of Names. | This volume contains the English translation of [NAME] (1895-1945) main work [NAME] der [NAME] (1936). In this book, [NAME] develops a general theory of knowledge of the social sciences in his role as a cross-border commuter between Husserl's phenomenology, [NAME]'s pure theory of law and the logical positivism of the Vienna Circle. This multilayered inquiry connects the value-oriented reflections of a general philosophy of science with the specificity of the methods and theories of the social sciences, as opposed to abstract natural science and psychology. The core focus of the study is the attempt to elucidate how and under what conditions scientific knowledge about social facts, empirically justified and theoretically embedded, can be obtained. The empirical basis of knowledge within the social sciences forms a phenomenological concept of experience. According to [NAME], this concept of experience exhibits a complex structure. Within the meaning-interpretation of human action as the core of knowledge in the social sciences, this structure reaches out across the isolated act of verification toward the synthesis of external and internal experiences. The book opens with a detailed and useful introduction by [NAME], which introduces the historical and theoretical background of Kaufmann's study and specifically illuminates his relation to [NAME] and [NAME]. Finally, it contains interviews with and letters to members of his family, colleagues and students. | <p>Unique translation of Kaufman's final 1936 work</p><p>Lays-out a detailed introduction and background to Kaufmann's work</p><p>Contains extracts from personal anecdotes from former students and colleagues</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-45087-7 | Philosophy | Cotton | [NAME], University of Sheffield, Sheffield, UK | Ethics and Technology Assessment: A [NAME] |  | Studies in Applied Philosophy, Epistemology and Rational Ethics | 13 | 1 | 2014 | 170 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 170 p. | 0 | final | 179 | Philosophy | Philosophy of Technology | SCE35000 | HP | Industrial and Production Engineering | SCT22008 | TGP | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Acknowledgements.- List of abbreviations.- Risk and public involvement in technology governance.- Ethics and technology.- Pragmatism, public deliberation and technology ethics.- Ethical tools.- Reflective Ethical Mapping.- Opening up ethical dialogue.- Judging and deciding.- Conclusions. | Whether it is nuclear power, geo-engineering or genetically modified foods, the development of new technologies can be fraught with complex ethical challenges and political controversy which defy simple resolution. In the past two decades there has been a shift towards processes of Participatory Technology Assessment designed to build channels of two-way communication between technical specialists and non-expert citizens, and to incorporate multiple stakeholder perspectives in the governance of contentious technology programmes. This participatory turn has spurred a need for new tools and techniques to encourage group deliberation and capture public values, moral and choices. This book specifically examines the ethical dimensions of controversial technologies, and discusses how these can be evaluated in a philosophically robust manner when the ones doing the deliberating are not ethicists, legal or technical experts. Grounded in philosophical pragmatism and drawing upon empirical work in partnership with citizen-stakeholders, this book presents a model called “Reflective Ethical Mapping” - a new meta-ethical framework and toolbox of techniques to facilitate citizen engagement with technology ethics. | <p>Addresses the theory, methods and practice of participatory technology assessment (pTA) in relation to large-scale technological and environmental policies and programs</p><p>Presents a practical and participatory decision procedure that facilitates the non-specialists' deliberations on the ethical aspects of controversial technologies</p><p>Develops and discusses an ethical decision-support procedure termed “Reflective Ethical Mapping” (REM), and evaluates it in a practical context: radioactive waste management in nuclear communities</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02017-4 | Philosophy | [NAME] | [NAME], Leuven, Belgium; [NAME], Boston College, [NAME], MA, USA | Phenomenology in a New Key - Between Analysis and History | Essays in Honor of [NAME] | Contributions to Phenomenology | 72 | 1 | 2013 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 250 p. | 0 | approx. | 139 | Philosophy | Phenomenology | SCE23000 | HPCF3 | History of Philosophy | SCE15000 | HPC | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | Planned | 2013-11-25 00:00:00 |  |  |  | In this collection of essays, the sophistication and vibrancy of contemporary phenomenological research is documented, including both its engagement with key figures in the history of philosophy as well as with critical problems defining future directions of philosophical investigations. It honors the writings of [NAME], whose work in phenomenological philosophy, analytic philosophy and the history of philosophy has served as model for generations of philosophers working between these three fields of research. The essays collected in this volume provide an unique window on the contemporary state of the art in phenomenological philosophy by leading scholars of international reputation from North America and Europe.  Historical figures such as Aristotle and [NAME] are innovatively brought into dialogue with phenomenological thinking. Phenomenological thinking is brought to bear on a wide variety of problems, from the nature of artworks and photography to questions concerning consciousness and intentionality. Among the topics discussed in these specially commissioned essays:  phenomenology and Aristotle; the nature of the primal ego; [NAME] and Husserl; intentionality and reference, the argument of transcendental idealism; [NAME] ethic; Husserl and [NAME]; photography; the nature of artworks. | <p>Presents a collection of essays on various topics in phenomenological philosophy by leading experts in North America and Europe </p><p>Examines the relation between Husserl’s phenomenology and Aristotle; the relation between [NAME] and Husserl on language; the contribution of Husserl’s thinking to ethics</p><p>Features the importance of a phenomenological approach to art; and the phenomenological contribution to questions of consciousness and intentionality</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7843-6 | Philosophy | Doorn | Neelke Doorn, Delft University of Technology, Delft, The Netherlands; [NAME], [NAME], Nijmegen, The Netherlands; [NAME], Delft University of Technology, Delft, The Netherlands; [NAME], University of Virginia, Virginia, VA, USA | Early engagement and new technologies: Opening up the laboratory |  | Philosophy of Engineering and Technology | 16 | 1 | 2014 | 255 | Hard cover | Book | VII, 255 p. 5 illus., 2 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Philosophy | Philosophy of Technology | SCE35000 | HP | R & D/Technology Policy | SCW12170 | [NAME] | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part 1. Introduction.- Chapter 1. Mandates and methods for early engagement; Schuurbiers, Daan, Doorn, Neelke, [NAME], Ibo, and Gorman, [NAME] E..- Chapter 2. Technology Assessment and approaches to early engagement; Grunwald, Armin and Achternbosch, Matthias.- Part 2. Approaches to Early Engagement.- Chapter 3. Constructive Technology Assessment and the methodology of insertion; Rip, Arie, and [NAME], Douglas.- Chapter 4. Value Sensitive Design; Friedman, [NAME], [NAME], Peter, Broning, [NAME], and [NAME], Alina.- Chapter 5. Socio-Technical integration research: Collaborative inquiry at the midstream of Research and Development; Fisher, [NAME], and Schuurbiers, Daan.- Chapter 6. Ethical Parallel Research: A Network Approach for Moral Evaluation (NAME); [NAME], Ibo, and Doorn, Neelke.- Chapter 7. Political TA: Opening up the political debate. Stimulating early engagement of parliamentarians and policy makers on emerging technologies – Attempts by the Rathenau Institute; [NAME], Rinie.- Part 3. Reflections.- Chapter 8. Integrating ethicists and social scientists into cutting edge research and technological development; Gorman, [NAME], Calleja-López, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], and Mahootian, Farzad.- Chapter 9. Collaboration as a research method? Navigating social scientific involvement in synthetic biology; [NAME], Jane.- Chapter 10. Ethicists in the laboratory: Reflecting about non-existent objects; [NAME], Simone.- Chapter 11. Metaphors and cohabitation within and beyond the walls of life sciences; Pauwels, Eleonore.- Chapter 12. Early engagement and new technologies: Towards Comprehensive Technology Engagement?; Doorn, Neelke, Schuurbiers, Daan, [NAME], Ibo, and Gorman, [NAME] | Despite the topic’s urgency and centrality, this is the first edited volume to offer a comprehensive assessment of the varying approaches to early engagement with new technologies, including nanotechnology, synthetic biology, biotechnology and ICT. Covering five main approaches to early engagement—constructive technology assessment (CTA), value-sensitive design (VSD), midstream modulation (MM), the network approach for moral evaluation, and political technology assessment—the book will be a pivotal text in the rapidly developing research field of ELSI, which explores the ethical, legal, and social implications of new technologies.Featuring leading scholars who discuss each early engagement approach in turn, the chapters cover both theory and applications, and include evaluative assessments of specific instances of early adoption of technologies. Further contributions focus on theoretical issues relevant to all approaches, including interdisciplinary cooperation, normativity and intervention, and political and public relevance. The publication has added profile due to the requirement of multi-billion-dollar research programs in the US and Europe to engage in ELSI research alongside that of the technical development itself, even in the early stages. Its comprehensive scrutiny of the core factors in early engagement will ensure a readership of policy makers as well as scientists and engineers. | <p>First book-length discussion of early engagement with new technologies</p><p>Comprehensive overview of main approaches in early engagement</p><p>Attention for underlying theoretical issues like interdisciplinary cooperation (trading zones), normativity, and the relation to tradition of laboratory studies</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-4640-4 | Philosophy | Dupont | [NAME], Charlottesville, VA, USA | Phenomenology in French Philosophy: Early Encounters |  | Phaenomenologica | 208 | 1 | 2014 | 338 | Hard cover | Book | XI, 338 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Philosophy | Phenomenology | SCE23000 | HPCF3 | History of Philosophy | SCE15000 | HPC | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | Available | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 | 2013-11-20 00:00:00 |  | ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.- INTRODUCTION.- I. The Occasion of the Dissertation.- II. The Contribution of the Dissertation.- III. Methodology and Terminology.- A. Definition of Reception.- B. Definition of Phenomenology.- C. Definition of Religious Thought.- IV. The Plan of the Dissertation.- CHAPTER 1 PRECURSORS TO THE RECEPTION OF PHENOMENOLOGY IN FRANCE, 1889-1909.- I. Three Major [NAME] in French Philosophy at the End of the Nineteenth Century.- A. Positivism.- B. Idealism.- C Spiritualism.- D. Conclusion: Anticipations of Phenomenology in French Positivism, Idealism and Spiritualism.-II. [NAME]: Lived Duration and Intuition.- [NAME] Insight.- [NAME] Principal Themes: Duration and Intuition.- [NAME] as a Precursor to Husserlian Phenomenology.- D. Bergson’s Influence on French Theologians.- III. [NAME]: A Phenomenology of Action.- [NAME] Insight.- B. Blondel’s Principal Theme: Action.- [NAME] as a Precursor to Husserlian Phenomenology.- D. Blondel’s Influence on French Theologians.- IV. Conclusion: Bergson and Blondel as Precursors to the Reception of Husserlian Phenomenology in France.- CHAPTER 2 FOUR PHASES IN THE RECEPTION OF PHENOMENOLOGY IN FRENCH PHILOSOPHY, 1910-1939.- I. Léon Noël and [NAME] Noël.- B. Victor Delbos.- C. Noël and [NAME] as Interpreters of Phenomenology.- II. [NAME] and [NAME] Héring.- C. Shestov’s Reply to Héring.- D. Héring’s Rebuttal to Shestov.- [NAME] and Héring as Interpreters of Phenomenology.- III. [NAME] and [NAME] Groethuysen.- B. Interlude: German Phenomenologists in France.- [NAME] Gurvitch.- [NAME] and Gurvitch as Interpreters of phenomenology.- IV. [NAME] and [NAME] Levinas.- B. Jean-Paul Sartre.- [NAME] and Sartre as Interpreters of Phenomenology.- V. Conclusion: Four Phases in the Reception of Phenomenology in French Philosophy, 1910-1939.- CHAPTER 3 RECEPTIONS OF PHENOMENOLOGICAL INSIGHTS IN FRENCH RELIGIOUS THOUGHT, 1901-1929.- I. Édouard Le Roy.- A. His Life and Works.- B. Le Roy and Bergson.- [NAME] Roy’s Application of Bergsonian Insights to Religious Thought.- D. Le Roy’s Contribution to the Theological Reception of Phenomenology.- II. Pierre Rousselot.- A. His Life and Works.- B. Rousselot and Blondel.- C. Rousselot’s Application of Blondelian Insights to Religious Thought.- D. Rousselot’s Contribution to the Theological Reception of Phenomenology.- CHAPTER 4 RECEPTIONS OF HUSSERLIAN PHENOMENOLOGY IN FRENCH RELIGIOUS THOUGHT, 1926-1939.- I. Jean Héring.- A. His Life and Works.- B. Phenomenology and the Philosophy of Religion.- C. Héring’s Application of Phenomenology to Religious Thought .- II. [NAME] His Life and Works.- B. Phenomenology and Theological Epistemology.- [NAME] to Religious Thought.- III. [NAME] and Works.- B. Phenomenology and the Critical Justification of Metaphysics.- C. Maréchal’s Application of Phenomenology to Religious Thought.- IV. Neo-Thomist Encounters with Phenomenology.- A. The Société Thomiste and the Journée d’Études.- [NAME] Appraisals of Phenomenology V. Conclusion: Two Stages in the Reception of Phenomenology in French Religious Thought Prior to 1939.- CONCLUSION.- I. Receptions of Phenomenology in French Academic Circles prior to 1939.- II. Appropriations of Phenomenology by French Philosophers.- III. Appropriations of Phenomenology by French Religious Thinkers.- IV. French Receptions of Phenomenology since 1939.- WORKS CITED. | This work investigates the early encounters of French philosophers and religious thinkers with the phenomenological philosophy of [NAME]. Following an introductory chapter addressing context and methodology, Chapter 2 argues that [NAME] insights into lived duration and intuition and [NAME] genetic description of action functioned as essential precursors to the French reception of phenomenology. Chapter 3 details the presentations of Husserl and his followers by three successive pairs of French academic philosophers: Léon Noël and [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME], and [NAME] and [NAME]. Chapter 4 then explores the appropriation of Bergsonian and Blondelian phenomenological insights by Catholic theologians Édouard Le [NAME] and [NAME]. Chapter 5 examines applications and critiques of phenomenology by French religious philosophers, including [NAME], [NAME], and neo-Thomists like [NAME]. A concluding chapter expounds the principal finding that philosophical and theological receptions of phenomenology in France prior to 1939 proceeded independently due to differences in how [NAME] and [NAME] were perceived by French philosophers and religious thinkers and their respective orientations to the Cartesian and Aristotelian/Thomist intellectual traditions. | <p>Only comprehensive account of how Husserlian phenomenology was introduced in France </p><p>Complements other histories of phenomenology, including [NAME]'s "Phenomenological Movement" </p><p>Distinguishes receptions of phenomenology among academic philosophers and religious thinkers​</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7198-7 | Philosophy | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Athens, Athens, Greece | History of Artificial Cold, Scientific, Technological and Cultural Issues |  | Boston Studies in the Philosophy and History of Science | 299 | 1 | 2014 | 288 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 288 p. 41 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Science, general | History of Science | SCA12000 | PDX | History and Philosophical Foundations of Physics | SCP29000 | PDX | General Science | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | Available | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 | 2013-11-15 00:00:00 | worldwide | Foreword.- About the Authors.- Table Of Contents.- The History of Artificial Cold –Historiographical issues; Kostas Gavroglu.- Investigating the Very Cold.- Early modern history of cold: [NAME] and the emergence of a new experimental field in 17th century experimental philosophy; Christiana Christopoulou.- James Dewar and the Road to the Liquefaction of Hydrogen; Sir [NAME] Rowlinson.- The cryogenic laboratory of Heike Kamerlingh Onnes: an early case of Big Science; [NAME] Delft.-  Superconductivity—a challenge to modern physics; [NAME] and [NAME]: how quantum mechanics became visible; Sébastien Balibar.- The physics of cold in the Cold War: “On-line computing” between the ICBM program and superconductivity; Johannes Knolle and Christian Joas.- Industries of Cold.- Domestic Ice-Making Machines 1830-1930; [NAME]-Acherman.- [NAME] and his relationship with [NAME]: The cooperation between two independent inventors in cryogenics and its side effects; [NAME] Dienel.- Meeting Artificial Cold: Expositions and Refrigeration, 1896-1937; Guillaume de Syon.- Consuming Cold.- The introduction of frozen foods in West Germany and its integration into the daily diet; Ulrike Thoms.- The Means of Modernization: Freezing Technologies and the Cultural Politics of Everyday Life, Norway 1940–1965; Terje Finstad.- The Invention of Refrigerated Transport and the Development of the International Dressed Meat Trade; [NAME]Fresher than fresh’. Remarks on consumer attitudes towards the development of the Cold Chain in post-WWII Greece; Faidra Papanelopoulou.- Index. | The history of artificial cold has been a rather intriguing interdisciplinary subject (physics, chemistry, technology, sociology, economics, anthropology, consumer studies) which despite some excellent monographs and research papers, has not been systematically exploited. It is a subject with all kinds of scientific, technological as well as cultural dimensions. For example, the common home refrigerator has brought about unimaginably deep changes to our everyday lives changing drastically eating habits and shopping mentalities. From the end of the 19th century to the beginning of the 21st, issues related to the production and exploitation of artificial cold have never stopped to provide us with an incredibly interesting set of phenomena, novel theoretical explanations, amazing possibilities concerning technological applications and all encompassing cultural repercussions. The discovery of the unexpected and “bizarre” phenomena of superconductivity and superfluidity, the necessity to incorporate macroscopic quantum phenomena to the framework of quantum mechanics, the discovery of [NAME] condensation and high temperature superconductivity, the use of superconducting magnets for high energy particle accelerators, the construction of new computer hardware, the extensive applications of cryomedicine, and the multi billion industry of frozen foods, are some of the more dramatic instances in the history of artificial cold. ​ | <p>Discusses technological and scientific dimensions as well as cultural implications   </p><p>Contains details of the  discovery of the unexpected and “bizarre” phenomena of superconductivity and superfluidity     </p><p>Focuses on issues related to the production and exploitation of artificial cold ​</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03253-5 | Philosophy | Gibbs | [NAME], Middlesex University, London, UK; [NAME], London University, London, UK | Thinking about Higher Education |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 201 | Hard cover | Book | IX, 201 p. 3 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Philosophy | Philosophy of Education | SCE25000 | JNA | Professional & Vocational Education | [NAME] | JNRV | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Introduction, [NAME] and [NAME] Imagination.- 2. Thinking about higher education, [NAME] Barnett.- 3. Higher Education and Ethical Imagination, Marianna Papastephanou.- 4. Happiness not Salaries: The decline of universities and the emergence of higher education, Paul Gibbs.- Section Two – Finding the Public Good.- 5. Higher education and public good, [NAME] Marginson.- 6. Forces in Tension: The State, Civil Society and Market in the Future of the University, [NAME] Pusser.- 7. [NAME]: Higher Education in Europe and the Global Public Good, [NAME] 8. Exploring futures for community engagement: uncertainty, difference, and responsibility, [NAME] Fenwick.- Section Three – Which knowledge and who can have it.- 9. Babies and bathwater: revaluing the role of the academy in knowledge, Leesa Wheelahan.- 10. Curriculum in Higher Education: Beyond false choices, Suellen Shay.- 11. Finding a Voice as a Student, [NAME] Bachelor.- 12. Into the heart of things Defrosting educational theory, [NAME] Bengtsen.- 13. Coda: Reaching for Higher Education. | With higher education around the world in a period of extreme flux, this volume explores its underlying philosophy, a core element of the ongoing debate. Offering a diverse range of perspectives from an international selection of renowned scholars of higher education, the book is full of imaginative insights that add up to a substantive contribution to the discussion.As universities attempt to adapt to a new environment characterized by stiff international competition, networked remote learning, burgeoning student numbers and comparative performance assessment, how we conceptualize the purpose and ethos of our higher learning institutions is more important than ever. This publication features a multitude of distinctive approaches that illuminate potential solutions to the complex issues universities must grapple with in these uncertain times. Rather than espousing a singular philosophical approach, the editors have assembled views from across the spectrum and from differing national contexts, representing a multidisciplinary response to the situation. This collection of papers aims thus to inspire fresh developments in the way we think about the complexities of and options available to, higher education. | <p>Presents a wide vision of the philosophical underpinning of professional education </p><p>Present a range of inquiries into the form, purpose and content of professional education, its delivery and its contribution to individual and societal well-being </p><p>Brings leading thinkers’ voices together in one volume</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7837-5 | Philosophy | [NAME] | [NAME], University of A Coruña, Ferrol (A Coruña), Spain | [NAME] to Representation and Models in Science |  | Synthese Library | 368 | 1 | 2014 | 230 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 230 p. 2 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Philosophy | Philosophy of Science | SCE34000 | PDA | Models and Principles | SCI18016 | UY | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Prologue; [NAME] 1. Philosophical Coordinates.- Chapter 1. “On Representation and Models in [NAME]”; [NAME]. “Scientific Activity as an Interpretative Practice. Empiricism, Constructivism and Pragmatism”; Inmaculada Perdomo.- Chapter 3. “Models and Phenomena: [NAME] Structuralism”; Iranzo, Valeriano.- Part 2. Models and Representations.- Chapter 4. “The Criterion of Empirical Grounding in the Sciences”; [NAME] Fraassen.- Chapter 5. “On Representing Evidence”; [NAME] Galavotti.- Part 3. Models and Reality.- Chapter 6. “The View from Within and the View from Above : Looking at van Fraassen’s Perrin”; Stathis Psillos.- Chapter 7. “Models and Phenomena: [NAME] Structuralism”;  Valeriano Iranzo.- Chapter 8. “Scientific Models and Abduction: The Role of Non Classical Logics”; [NAME] Nepomuceno.- Part 4. Scientific Explanation and Epistemic Values Judgments.- Chapter 9. “Explanation as a Pragmatic Virtue: [NAME]”; Margarita Santana.- Chapter 10. “Values, Choices, and Epistemic Stances”, [NAME]. | This book analyzes [NAME] characterization of representation and models in science. In this regard, it presents the philosophical coordinates of his approach and pays attention to his structural empiricism as a framework for his views on scientific representations and models. These are developed here through two new contributions made by [NAME]. In addition, there are analyses of the relation between models and reality in his approach, where the complexity of this conception is considered in detail. Furthermore, there is an examination of scientific explanation and epistemic values judgments. This volume includes a wealth of bibliographical information on his philosophy and relevant philosophical issues.[NAME] is a key figure in contemporary philosophy of science, as the prestigious Hempel Award shows. His views on scientific representation offer new ideas on how it should be characterized, and his conception of models shows a novelty that goes beyond other empiricists’ approaches of recent times. Both aspects — the characterization of scientific representation and the conception of models in science — are part of a deliberate attempt to forge a “structural empiricism,” an alternative to structural realism based on an elaborated version of empiricism. | <p>Analyzes the work of an important thinker in contemporary philosophy, very influential in recent decades</p><p><p>Contributes with new solutions to the topic of representations and models in science</p><p><p>Includes two new papers by [NAME] | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7758-3 | Philosophy | [NAME] | [NAME], Royal Institute of Technology (KTH) Div. Philosophy, Stockholm, Sweden | [NAME] on Classical Methods for Non-Classical Problems |  | Outstanding Contributions to Logic | 3 | 1 | 2014 | 373 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 373 p. 16 illus. | 0 | final | 179 | Philosophy | Logic | SCE16000 | HPL | Mathematical Logic and Formal Languages | SCI16048 | UYA | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Contributors.- Introductory.- Chapter 1. [NAME]: Preview.- Chapter 2. [NAME] and [NAME]: [NAME] and the extension of classical logic.- Chapter 3. [NAME]: A tale of five cities.- I. Logic of Belief Change.- Chapter 4. [NAME] and [NAME]: Safe contraction [NAME]. [NAME]: A panorama of iterated revision.- Chapter 6. [NAME]: AGM, ranking theory and the many ways to cope with examples.- Chapter 7. [NAME]: Liars, lotteries and prefaces: two paraconsistent theories of belief revision.- Chapter 8. Rohit Parikh: Epistemic reasoning in life and literature.- II. Uncertain Reasoning.- Chapter 9. [NAME]: New Horn rules for probabilistic consequence: Is O+ enough?.- Chapter 10. [NAME]: Non-monotonic logic: preferential vs. algebraic semantics.- Chapter 11. [NAME] a Bayesian theory of second-order uncertainty: lessons from non-standard logics.- III. Normative Systems.- Chapter 12. [NAME]: Abstract interfaces of input/output logic.- Chapter 13. Xavier Parent, [NAME] and [NAME] [NAME]: Intuitionistic basis for input/output logic.- Chapter 14. [NAME]: Reasoning about permission and obligation.- Chapter 15. [NAME]: Norm change in the common law.- IV. Classical Resources.- Chapter 16. [NAME]: Intelim rules for classical connectives.- Chapter 17. [NAME]: Relevance logic as a conservative extension of classical [NAME] 18. [NAME]: Reflections on contributions.- Bibliographical.- [NAME] publications.- Index. | The volume analyses and develops [NAME] efforts to make classical logic useful outside its most obvious application areas. The book contains chapters that analyse, appraise, or reshape Makinson’s work and chapters that develop themes emerging from his contributions. These are grouped into major areas to which Makinsons has made highly influential contributions and the volume in its entirety is divided into four sections, each devoted to a particular area of logic: belief change, uncertain reasoning, normative systems and the resources of classical logic.Among the contributions included in the volume, one chapter focuses on the “inferential preferential method”, i.e. the combined use of classical logic and mechanisms of preference and choice and provides examples from Makinson’s work in non-monotonic and defeasible reasoning and belief revision. One chapter offers a short autobiography by Makinson which details his discovery of modern logic, his travels across continents and reveals his intellectual encounters and inspirations. The chapter also contains an unusually explicit statement on his views on the (limited but important) role of logic in philosophy. | <p>Offers a collection of analyses, discussions and interpretations on celebrated logician, [NAME], work bridging classical and non-classical logic</p><p>Highlights the areas of logic in which Makinson had significant influence</p><p>Provides a short autobiography by Makinson which details his intellectual encounters and inspirations as well as his candid views on the role of logic in philosophy</p><p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-01615-3 | Philosophy | [NAME] | [NAME], University College Dublin, Dublin, Ireland; [NAME], University College Dublin School of Philosophy, Dublin, Ireland | The Phenomenology of Embodied Subjectivity |  | Contributions to Phenomenology | 71 | 1 | 2013 | 353 | Hard cover | Book | XXXIX, 353 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Philosophy | Phenomenology | SCE23000 | HPCF3 | Cognitive Psychology | SCY20060 | JMR | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Editors’ Introduction, R.T. Jensen & D. Moran.- Part I: The Acting Body: Habit, Freedom and Imagination.- 1. Habit and Attention, [NAME]. Affordances and Unreflective Freedom, E. Rietveld.- 3. Merleau-Ponty and the Transcendental Problem concerning Bodily Agency, R.T. Jensen.- 4. Imagination, Embodiment and Situatedness: Using Husserl to Dispel (Some) Notions of ‘Off-Line Thinking’, J. Jansen.- Part II: : The Body in Perception: Normality and the Constitution of Life-World.- 5. Transcendental Intersubjectivity and Normality: Constitution by Mortals, S. Heinämaa.- 6. The Body as a System of Concordance and the Perceptual World, I. de los Reyes Melero.- 7. Life-world as an Embodiment of Spiritual Meaning:  The Constitutive Dynamics of Activity and Passivity in Husserl, S. Pulkkinen.- 8. Intersubjectivity, Interculturality, and Realities in Husserl Research Manuscripts on the Life-world ([NAME]), T. Nenon.- Part III: The Body in Sickness and Health: Some Case Studies.- 9. Chronic Pain in Phenomenological/Anthropological Perspective, K. Morris.- 10. Inter-Subjectively Meaningful Symptoms in Anorexia, D. Legrand.- 11. The Alteration of Embodiment in Melancholia, S. Micali.- 12. The Structure of Interpersonal Experience, M. Ratcliffe.- Part IV: Intercorporeality and Intersubjectivity: Ideality, Language and Community.- 13. Facts and Fantasies - Embodiment and the early Formation of Selfhood, J. Taipale.- 14. Self-variation and Self-modification – or the different Ways of Being Other, C. Lobo.- 15. The Phenomenology of Embodiment: Intertwining and Reflexivity, D. Moran.- 16. Language as the Embodiment of Geometry, T. Baldwin.- 17. The Body Politic: Husserl and the Embodied Community, [NAME]. | The 17 original essays of this volume explore the relevance of the phenomenological approach to contemporary debates concerning the role of embodiment in our cognitive, emotional and practical life. The papers demonstrate the theoretical vitality and critical potential of the phenomenological tradition both through critically engagement with other disciplines (medical anthropology, psychoanalysis, psychiatry, the cognitive sciences) and through the articulation of novel interpretations of classical works in the tradition, in particular the works of [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME]. The concrete phenomena analyzed in this book include: chronic pain, [NAME], melancholia and depression. | <p>Offers original research on the relevance of classical phenomenology for medicine, Psychopathology and the cognitive sciences </p><p>Provides a critical discussion on Merleau-Ponty's attempt at overcoming the mind-body dualism </p><p>Includes a number of papers advancing the understanding of Husserl's later works, in particular the latest Life-World manuscripts ([NAME] 39)</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7913-6 | Philosophy | Kroes | [NAME], Delft University of Technology, Delft, The Netherlands; [NAME], University of Twente, Enschede, The Netherlands | The Moral Status of Technical Artefacts |  | Philosophy of Engineering and Technology | 17 | 1 | 2014 | 250 | Hard cover | Book | VI, 250 p. 4 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Philosophy | Philosophy of Technology | SCE35000 | HP | Engineering, general | SCT00004 | TBC | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction: the moral status of technical artefacts; [NAME] and [NAME] Verbeek.- Chapter 1. Agency in Humans and in Artifacts: A Contested Discourse; [NAME] Mitcham.- Chapter 2. Towards a post-human intra-actional account of sociomaterial agency (and Morality); Lucas Introna.- Chapter 3. Which came first, the doer or the deed?; [NAME] Hanson.- Chapter 4. Some misunderstandings about the moral significance of technology; [NAME] Verbeek.- Chapter 5. “Guns don’t kill, people kill”; values in and/or around technologies; [NAME]. Can technology embody values?; [NAME] and [NAME]. From moral agents to moral factors: the structural ethics approach; [NAME] 8. Artefactual agency and artefactual moral agency; [NAME] and [NAME] Noorman.- Chapter 9. Artefacts, agency, and action schemes; Christian Illies and [NAME] Meijers.- Chapter 10. Artificial agents and their moral nature; [NAME] Floridi.- Chapter 11. The good, the bad, the ugly and the poor: instrumental and non- instrumental values of artefacts; Maarten Franssen.- Chapter 12. Values in Chemistry and Engineering; [NAME]. | This book considers the question: to what extent does it make sense to qualify technical artefacts as moral entities? The authors’ contributions trace recent proposals and topics including instrumental and non-instrumental values of artefacts, agency and artefactual agency, values in and around technologies, and the moral significance of technology. The editors’ introduction explains that as ‘agents’ rather than simply passive instruments, technical artefacts may actively influence their users, changing the way they perceive the world, the way they act in the world and the way they interact with each other. This volume features the work of various experts from around the world, representing a variety of positions on the topic. Contributions explore the contested discourse on agency in humans and artefacts, defend the Value Neutrality Thesis by arguing that technological artefacts do not contain, have or exhibit values, or argue that moral agency involves both human and non-human elements.The book also investigates technological fields that are subject to negative moral valuations due to the harmful effects of some of their products. It includes an analysis of some difficulties arising in Artificial Intelligence and an exploration of values in Chemistry and in Engineering. The Moral Status of Technical Artefacts is an advanced exploration of the various dimensions of the relations between technology and morality | <p>Traces recent proposals that ascribe some form of moral agency to technology and technical artefacts </p><p>Contains a plethora of arguments and counterarguments on the moral status of technology and technical artefacts</p><p>Presents work that connects with many sub-disciplines of philosophy, and with disciplines beyond philosophy</p><p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02942-9 | Philosophy | Lihoreau | Franck Lihoreau, New University of Lisbon, Lisbon, Portugal; [NAME], University of Lorraine, [NAME], France | Epistemology, [NAME], and Formalism |  | Synthese Library | 369 | 1 | 2014 | 252 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 252 p. 14 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Philosophy | Epistemology | SCE13000 | HPK | Mathematical Logic and Formal Languages | SCI16048 | UYA | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction; Franck Lihoreau and [NAME] Rebuschi.- Chapter 1. Context as Assumptions; Erich Rast.- Chapter 2. Knowledge and Disagreement; [NAME] 3. A Contradiction for Contextualism?; [NAME] Baumann.- Chapter 4. Epistemic [NAME] and Indexicality; Yves Bouchard.- Chapter 5. Knowing Who: How Perspectives and Context Interact; [NAME] and [NAME] Jacinto.- Chapter 6. Knowledge Attributions in Context of Decision Problems; [NAME] Chapter 7. How Context Dependent is Scientific Knowledge?; [NAME] Hansson.- Chapter 8. Action, Failure and Free Will Choice in Epistemic stit Logic; [NAME] and [NAME] 9. Belief, Intention and Practicality: Loosening Up Agents and Their Propositional Attitudes; [NAME] Thomason.- Chapter 10. Character Matching and the Locke Pocket of Belief; Gregory Wheeler.- Chapter 11. A modal logic of perceptual belief; [NAME] and Emiliano Lorini.- Chapter 12. Hyperintensionality and De Re Beliefs A Counterpart-Theoretic Account; [NAME] Égré.- Chapter 13. Knowledge Is Justifiable True Information; [NAME]. | The main purpose of the present volume is to advance our understanding of the notions of knowledge and context, the connections between them and the ways in which they can be modeled, in particular formalized – a question of prime importance and utmost relevance to such diverse disciplines as philosophy, linguistics, computer science and artificial intelligence and cognitive science.Bringing together essays written by world-leading experts and emerging researchers in epistemology, logic, philosophy of language, linguistics and theoretical computer science, the book examines the formal modeling of knowledge and the knowledge-context link at one or more of three intersections - context and epistemology, epistemology and formalism, formalism and context – and presents a novel range of approaches to the current discussions that the connections between knowledge, language, action, reasoning and context continually enlivens. It develops powerful ideas that will push the relevant fields forward and give a sense of the new directions in which mainstream and formal research on knowledge and context is heading. | <p>Examines a question of prime importance to such diverse disciplines as philosophy, linguistics, computer science and artificial intelligence, and cognitive science </p><p>Brings together essays written by world-leading experts and emerging researchers </p><p>Presents a novel range of approaches that deepens the understanding of the connection between knowledge, language, action, reasoning and context</p><p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02701-2 | Philosophy | Lloyd | [NAME], University of Queensland, Brisbane, QLD, Australia | The Discourse of Sensibility | The Knowing Body in the Enlightenment | Studies in History and Philosophy of Science | 35 | 1 | 2013 | 215 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 215 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Science, general | History of Science | SCA12000 | PDX | History of Philosophy | SCE15000 | HPC | Humanities / History | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Acknowledgements.- Table of Contents.- Contributors.- 1. The Discourse of Sensibilité: The Knowing Body in the Enlightenment; [NAME] 2. [NAME] and the Rise of Sentiment’s Empire; Bridget Orr.- 3. Rochester’s Libertine Poetry as Philosophical Education; [NAME] and Justin Clemens.- 4. Emotional Sensations and the Moral Imagination in Malebranche; Jordan Taylor.- 5. Feeling Better: Moral Sense and Sensibility in Enlightenment Thought; [NAME] Cook.- 6. Physician, Heal Thyself! Emotions and the Health of the Learned in Samuel Auguste André [NAME] (1728–1797) and [NAME] (1728–1801); Yasmin Haskell.- 7. Penseurs profonds: Sensibility and the Knowledge-Seeker in Eighteenth-Century France; [NAME] 8. Sensibility as Vital Force or as Property of Matter in Mid-Eighteenth-Century Debates; [NAME] 9. Sensibilité, Embodied Epistemology, and the French Enlightenment; [NAME] 10. Sensibility in [NAME]: Imagined Realities, Perception Machines, and the Problem of Experience in Modernity.- [NAME] | This volume reconstructs the body of sensibility and the discourse which constructed it. The discourse of sensibility was deployed very widely throughout the mid- to late-eighteenth century, particularly in France and Britain. To inquire into the body of sensibility is then necessarily to enter into an interdisciplinary space and so to invite the plurality of methodological approaches which this collection exemplifies. The chapters collected here draw together the histories of literature and aesthetics, metaphysics and epistemology, moral theory, medicine, and cultural history. Together, they contribute to four major themes: First, the collection reconstructs various modes by which the sympathetic subject was construed or scripted, including through the theatre, poetry, literature, and medical and philosophical treaties. It secondly draws out those techniques of affective pedagogy which were implied by the medicalisation of the knowing body, and thirdly highlights the manner in which the body of sensibility was constructed as simultaneously particular and universal. Finally, it illustrates the ‘centrifugal forces’ at play within the discourse, and the anxiety which often accompanied them.At the centre of eighteenth-century thought was a very particular object: the body of sensibility, the Enlightenment’s knowing body. The persona of the knowledge-seeker was constructed by drawing together mind and matter, thought and feeling. And so where the Enlightenment thinker is generally associated with reason, truth-telling, and social and political reform, the Enlightenment is also known for its valorisation of emotion. During the period, intellectual pursuits were envisioned as having a distinctly embodied and emotional aspect. The body of ‘sensibility’ encompassed these apparently disparate strands and was associated with terms including ‘sentimental’, ‘sentiment’, ‘sense’, ‘sensation’, and ‘sympathy’. | <p>Revision of the idea that [NAME] was 'rationalist' </p><p>Of interest to contemporary theorists of affect and the body</p><p>This volume will recreate the discourse on sensibility</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02437-0 | Philosophy | McCormmach | [NAME] | The Personality of [NAME] of a Historian of Science |  | Archimedes | 36 | 1 | 2014 | 286 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 286 p. 82 illus., 3 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Science, general | History of Science | SCA12000 | PDX | Personality and Social Psychology | SCY20050 | JMS | General Science | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Table of Contents.- List of Illustrations.- Preface.- Part I. He Always Knew What Was Right for Him.- 1. The Person.- 2. Normality, Abnormality, and Scientists.- 3. Everyday Life.- 4. Life of Natural Philosophy.- 5. Aspects of Personality.- 6. Views of Cavendish.- 7. Eccentricity.- 8. Autism.- 9. Conclusion.- Part II. He Saw What Interested Him.- 10. The Traveler.- Appendix 1. Journal of 1785.- Appendix 2. Cavendish and Grey Family Trees.- Appendix 3. Letters between Brothers: [NAME] and [NAME]. Cavendish’s Houses: [NAME] and [NAME] Square.- Appendix 5. Cavendishes, Lowthers, and Holker Hall.- Appendix 6. Autism.- Appendix 7. Physical Theory and Theory of Autism.- Bibliography.- Index. | Profiles the eminent 18th century natural philosopher [NAME], best known for his work in chemistry and physics and one of the most baffling personalities in the history of science. In these chapters we are introduced to the psychology of science and of scientists and we learn about Cavendish’s life and times. His personality is examined from two perspectives: one is that he had a less severe form of autism, as has been claimed; the other is that he was eccentric and a psychological disorder was absent.[NAME] lived a life of science, possibly more completely than any other figure in the history of science: a wealthy aristocrat, he became a dedicated scientist. This study brings new information and a new perspective to our understanding of the man. The scientific and non-scientific sides of his life are brought closer together, as the author traces topics including his appearance, speech, wealth, religion and death as well as Cavendish’s life of natural philosophy where objectivity and accuracy, writing and recognition all played a part. The author traces aspects of Cavendish’s personality, views and interpretations of him, and explores notions of eccentricity and autism before detailing relevant aspects of the travels made by our subject. The author considers the question “How do we talk about Cavendish?” and provides a useful summary of Cavendish’s travels. This book will appeal to a wide audience, from those interested in 18th century history or history of science, to those interested in incidences of autism in prominent figures from history. This volume contains ample relevant illustrations, several interesting appendices and it includes a useful index and bibliography. | <p>Introduces the psychology of science and of scientists</p><p>Brings new information and a new perspective to our understanding of the man</p><p>Details [NAME] life and times and a useful summary of Cavendish’s travels</p><p>Contains ample relevant illustrations, several interesting appendices and it includes a useful index and bibliography</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03451-5 | Philosophy | Montano | [NAME], National Autonomous University of Mexico, Mexico City, Mexico | Explaining Beauty in Mathematics: An Aesthetic Theory of Mathematics |  | Synthese Library | 370 | 1 | 2014 | 259 | Hard cover | Book | XX, 259 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Philosophy | Logic | SCE16000 | HPL | Mathematical Logic and Foundations | SCM24005 | PBC | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-11-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Part 1. Antecedents.- Chapter 1. On Non-literal Approaches.- Chapter 2. Beautiful, Literally.- Chapter 3. Ugly, Literally.- Chapter 4. Problems of the Aesthetic Induction.- Chapter 5. Naturalizing the Aesthetic Induction.- Part 2. An Aesthetics of Mathematics.- Chapter 6. Introduction to a Naturalistic Aesthetic Theory.- Chapter 7. Aesthetic Experience.- Chapter 8. Aesthetic Value.- Chapter 9. [NAME] I: Concept.- Chapter 10. Aesthetic Judgement II: Functions.- Chapter 11. Mathematical Aesthetic Judgements.- Part 3. Applications.- Chapter 12. Case Analysis I: Beauty.- Chapter 13. Case Analysis II: Elegance.- Chapter 14. Case Analysis III: Ugliness, Revisited.- Chapter 15. Issues of Mathematical Beauty, Revisited. | This book develops a naturalistic aesthetic theory that accounts for aesthetic phenomena in mathematics in the same terms as it accounts for more traditional aesthetic phenomena. Building upon a view advanced by [NAME], the assertion is that beauty in science does not confine itself to anecdotes or personal idiosyncrasies, but rather that it had played a role in shaping the development of science. Mathematicians often evaluate certain pieces of mathematics using words like beautiful, elegant, or even ugly. Such evaluations are prevalent, however, rigorous investigation of them, of mathematical beauty, is much less common. The volume integrates the basic elements of aesthetics, as it has been developed over the last 200 years, with recent findings in neuropsychology as well as a good knowledge of mathematics.The volume begins with a discussion of the reasons to interpret mathematical beauty in a literal or non-literal fashion, which also serves to survey historical and contemporary approaches to mathematical beauty. The author concludes that literal approaches are much more coherent and fruitful, however, much is yet to be done. In this respect two chapters are devoted to the revision and improvement of [NAME]’s theory of the role of beauty in science. These antecedents are used as a foundation to formulate a naturalistic aesthetic theory. The central idea of the theory is that aesthetic phenomena should be seen as constituting a complex dynamical system which the author calls the aesthetic as process theory.The theory comprises explications of three central topics: aesthetic experience (in mathematics), aesthetic value and aesthetic judgment. The theory is applied in the final part of the volume and is used to account for the three most salient and often used aesthetic terms often used in mathematics: beautiful, elegant and ugly. This application of the theory serves to illustrate the theory in action, but also to further discuss and develop some details and to showcase the theory’s explanatory capabilities. | <p>Most comprehensive, systematic and scientifically informed study of aesthetic judgments in mathematics </p><p>Develops a naturalistic aesthetic theory that accounts for aesthetic phenomena in mathematics </p><p>Draws upon a broad spectrum of insights, from experimental psychology to the history of science and linguistics, to advance a rigorous and comprehensive theory of beauty and the aesthetic in mathematics</p><p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6957-1 | Philosophy | Oppy | [NAME], Monash University School of Philosophy & Bioethics, Clayton, VIC, Australia; [NAME], Australian Catholic University, [NAME], VIC, Australia | History of Philosophy in Australia and New Zealand |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 790 | Hard cover | Book | X, 790 p. | 1 | final | 549 | Philosophy | History of Philosophy | SCE15000 | HPC | Philosophy | SCE00003 | HP | Philosophy | Handbook | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-01-01 00:00:00 |  |  | Volume 1.- 1920s and Before: Idealist Origins by Martin Davies and [NAME] Helgeby.- 2. 1930s: [NAME] Arrives by [NAME] Weblin.- 3. 1940s: The Influence of Wittgenstein by Graeme Marshall.- 4. 1950s: A Steady State by [NAME]. 1960s: Political Polarisation by [NAME] and [NAME] Crittenden.- 6. 1970s: Turbulent Times by Aubrey Townsend.- 7. 1980s: Limits to Growth by Lynda Burns.- 8. 1990s: The Canberra Plan and the Diversification of Australasian Philosophy by [NAME]. 2000s: Philosophers in [NAME] by [NAME] Oppy.- Volume II.- 10. From Conventionalism to Scientific Metaphysics by [NAME] Ellis.- 11. Metaphysics  by [NAME]. Epistemology by [NAME] Hetherington.- 13. Philosophy of Language by [NAME]; with [NAME]: The University of Melbourne, Philosophy of Language, and the Oxford Connection by [NAME] Robinson.- 14. Philosophy of Religion in Australasia: Philosophy of Religion in Australia by [NAME]; and Philosophy of Religion in New Zealand by [NAME] Perszyk.- 15. Aesthetics and Philosophy of Music in Australasia: Aesthetics in Australasia: 1945-2005 by [NAME]; and Philosophy of Music in Australasia by [NAME]. Moral Philosophy in Australasia by Justin Oakley.- 17. Environmental Philosophy by Freya Matthews.- 18. Feminist Philosophy by Catriona Mackenzie.- 19. Black Swan: A History of Continental Philosophy in Australia and New Zealand by Robert Sinnerbrink & Matheson Russell.- 20. Logic by [NAME] Mortensen.- 21. History and Philosophy of Science by [NAME], Rod Home, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], Philip Catton & Ruth Barton.- 22. Philosophy of Mind and Cognitive Science since 1980 by Elizabeth Schier & [NAME]. | The History of Philosophy in Australia and New Zealand is a comprehensive account of the historical development of philosophy in Australia and New Zealand, from the establishment of the first Philosophy Chair in Australasia in 1886 at the University of Melbourne to the current burgeoning of Australasian philosophy. The work is divided into two broad sections, the first providing an account of significant developments and events during various periods in the history of Australasian philosophy, and the second focusing on ideas and theories that have been influential in various disciplines within Australasian philosophy. The work consists of chapters contributed by various philosophers, on specific fields of inquiry or historical periods within Australasian philosophy. | <p>The most comprehensive historical record to date of the development of Australasian philosophy</p><p>A remarkable account of Australasia's major contribution to philosophy</p><p>A highly original contribution informed by an extensive pool of published and non-published literature</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6958-8 | Philosophy | Oppy | [NAME], Monash University School of Philosophy & Bioethics, Clayton, VIC, Australia; [NAME], Australian Catholic University, [NAME], VIC, Australia | History of Philosophy in Australia and New Zealand |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 790 |  | eReference work | X, 790 p. eReference. | 1 | final | 549 | Philosophy | History of Philosophy | SCE15000 | HPC | Philosophy | SCE00003 | HP | Philosophy | Handbook | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-01-01 00:00:00 |  |  | Volume 1.- 1920s and Before: Idealist Origins by Martin Davies and [NAME] Helgeby.- 2. 1930s: [NAME] Arrives by [NAME] Weblin.- 3. 1940s: The Influence of Wittgenstein by Graeme Marshall.- 4. 1950s: A Steady State by [NAME]. 1960s: Political Polarisation by [NAME] and [NAME] Crittenden.- 6. 1970s: Turbulent Times by Aubrey Townsend.- 7. 1980s: Limits to Growth by Lynda Burns.- 8. 1990s: The Canberra Plan and the Diversification of Australasian Philosophy by [NAME]. 2000s: Philosophers in [NAME] by [NAME] Oppy.- Volume II.- 10. From Conventionalism to Scientific Metaphysics by [NAME] Ellis.- 11. Metaphysics  by [NAME]. Epistemology by [NAME] Hetherington.- 13. Philosophy of Language by [NAME]; with [NAME]: The University of Melbourne, Philosophy of Language, and the Oxford Connection by [NAME] Robinson.- 14. Philosophy of Religion in Australasia: Philosophy of Religion in Australia by [NAME]; and Philosophy of Religion in New Zealand by [NAME] Perszyk.- 15. Aesthetics and Philosophy of Music in Australasia: Aesthetics in Australasia: 1945-2005 by [NAME]; and Philosophy of Music in Australasia by [NAME]. Moral Philosophy in Australasia by Justin Oakley.- 17. Environmental Philosophy by Freya Matthews.- 18. Feminist Philosophy by Catriona Mackenzie.- 19. Black Swan: A History of Continental Philosophy in Australia and New Zealand by Robert Sinnerbrink & Matheson Russell.- 20. Logic by [NAME] Mortensen.- 21. History and Philosophy of Science by [NAME], Rod Home, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], Philip Catton & Ruth Barton.- 22. Philosophy of Mind and Cognitive Science since 1980 by Elizabeth Schier & [NAME]. | The History of Philosophy in Australia and New Zealand is a comprehensive account of the historical development of philosophy in Australia and New Zealand, from the establishment of the first Philosophy Chair in Australasia in 1886 at the University of Melbourne to the current burgeoning of Australasian philosophy. The work is divided into two broad sections, the first providing an account of significant developments and events during various periods in the history of Australasian philosophy, and the second focusing on ideas and theories that have been influential in various disciplines within Australasian philosophy. The work consists of chapters contributed by various philosophers, on specific fields of inquiry or historical periods within Australasian philosophy. | <p>The most comprehensive historical record to date of the development of Australasian philosophy</p><p>A remarkable account of Australasia's major contribution to philosophy</p><p>A highly original contribution informed by an extensive pool of published and non-published literature</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6959-5 | Philosophy | Oppy | [NAME], Monash University School of Philosophy & Bioethics, Clayton, VIC, Australia; [NAME], Australian Catholic University, [NAME], VIC, Australia | History of Philosophy in Australia and New Zealand |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 790 | Hard cover | Book + Online Access | X, 790 p. Print + eReference. | 1 | final | 689 | Philosophy | History of Philosophy | SCE15000 | HPC | Philosophy | SCE00003 | HP | Philosophy | Handbook | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-01-01 00:00:00 |  |  | Volume 1.- 1920s and Before: Idealist Origins by Martin Davies and [NAME] Helgeby.- 2. 1930s: [NAME] Arrives by [NAME] Weblin.- 3. 1940s: The Influence of Wittgenstein by Graeme Marshall.- 4. 1950s: A Steady State by [NAME]. 1960s: Political Polarisation by [NAME] and [NAME] Crittenden.- 6. 1970s: Turbulent Times by Aubrey Townsend.- 7. 1980s: Limits to Growth by Lynda Burns.- 8. 1990s: The Canberra Plan and the Diversification of Australasian Philosophy by [NAME]. 2000s: Philosophers in [NAME] by [NAME] Oppy.- Volume II.- 10. From Conventionalism to Scientific Metaphysics by [NAME] Ellis.- 11. Metaphysics  by [NAME]. Epistemology by [NAME] Hetherington.- 13. Philosophy of Language by [NAME]; with [NAME]: The University of Melbourne, Philosophy of Language, and the Oxford Connection by [NAME] Robinson.- 14. Philosophy of Religion in Australasia: Philosophy of Religion in Australia by [NAME]; and Philosophy of Religion in New Zealand by [NAME] Perszyk.- 15. Aesthetics and Philosophy of Music in Australasia: Aesthetics in Australasia: 1945-2005 by [NAME]; and Philosophy of Music in Australasia by [NAME]. Moral Philosophy in Australasia by Justin Oakley.- 17. Environmental Philosophy by Freya Matthews.- 18. Feminist Philosophy by Catriona Mackenzie.- 19. Black Swan: A History of Continental Philosophy in Australia and New Zealand by Robert Sinnerbrink & Matheson Russell.- 20. Logic by [NAME] Mortensen.- 21. History and Philosophy of Science by [NAME], Rod Home, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], Philip Catton & Ruth Barton.- 22. Philosophy of Mind and Cognitive Science since 1980 by Elizabeth Schier & [NAME]. | The History of Philosophy in Australia and New Zealand is a comprehensive account of the historical development of philosophy in Australia and New Zealand, from the establishment of the first Philosophy Chair in Australasia in 1886 at the University of Melbourne to the current burgeoning of Australasian philosophy. The work is divided into two broad sections, the first providing an account of significant developments and events during various periods in the history of Australasian philosophy, and the second focusing on ideas and theories that have been influential in various disciplines within Australasian philosophy. The work consists of chapters contributed by various philosophers, on specific fields of inquiry or historical periods within Australasian philosophy. | <p>The most comprehensive historical record to date of the development of Australasian philosophy</p><p>A remarkable account of Australasia's major contribution to philosophy</p><p>A highly original contribution informed by an extensive pool of published and non-published literature</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03043-2 | Philosophy | Rebuschi | [NAME], Université de Lorraine, [NAME], France; MARTINE BATT, Université de Lorraine, [NAME], France; [NAME], Université de Lorraine, [NAME], France; Franck Lihoreau, Universidade [NAME], [NAME], Portugal; [NAME], Université de Lorraine, [NAME], France; [NAME], Université de Lorraine, [NAME], France | Interdisciplinary Works in Logic, Epistemology, Psychology and Linguistics | Dialogue, [NAME], and Formalism | Logic, Argumentation & Reasoning | 3 | 1 | 2014 | 391 | Hard cover | Book | X, 391 p. 32 illus., 1 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 179 | Philosophy | Logic | SCE16000 | HPL | Semantics | [NAME] | CFG | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1. General Introduction; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], Franck Lihoreau, [NAME] and Alain Trognon.- Part I Historical Context.- Chapter 2. Phenomenology, “Grundwissenschaft” and “Ideologiekritik”: [NAME] of the Erlangen school; Christian Thiel.- Chapter 3. Geometry as a Measurement-Theoretical A Priori. Lorenzen’s Defense of Relativity against the Ontology of its Proponents; [NAME]. Correspondence between [NAME] and [NAME] (1951-1955); [NAME], [NAME], and [NAME] Tremblay.- Part II Epistemology, [NAME], Formalism.- Chapter 5. Principles of Knowledge, [NAME] and Conditional Belief; Guillaume Aucher.- Chapter 6. Procedural Information and the Dynamics of Belief; [NAME] Pacuit.- Chapter 7. Reasoning about [NAME] in Context; Franck Lihoreau and [NAME] Rebuschi.- Chapter 8. The Epistemic Closure Principle and the Assessment Sensitivity of Knowledge Attributions; [NAME] in Interactive Context.- Chapter 9. From Dialogue to Calculation; [NAME] and Alain Trognon.- Chapter 10. Dialogue of Rationalities: A Case Study; Marcelo Dascal.- Chapter 11. Pragmatics of Veridicity; [NAME] Vernant.- Chapter 12. Rationality of Performance ; Edda Weigand.- Part IV Conversation, Pathology, Formalization.- Chapter 13. Modeling the Dynamic Effects of Discourse: Principles and [NAME]; [NAME] and Sylvain Pogodalla.- Chapter 14. Dialogue Analysis: Pragmatic and Rhetorical Aspects; [NAME] and Anne Xuereb.- Chapter 15. Investigating Discourse Specificities in [NAME]; [NAME] and Frédéric Verhaegen.- Chapter 16. Using SDRT to Analyze Pathological Conversations. Logicality, Rationality and Pragmatic Deviances; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Musiol.- Index. | This book presents comparisons of recent accounts in the formalization of natural language (dynamic logics and formal semantics) with informal conceptions of interaction (dialogue, natural logic and attribution of rationality) that have been developed in both psychology and epistemology. There are four parts which explore: historical and systematic studies; the formalization of context in epistemology; the formalization of reasoning in interactive contexts in psychology; the formalization of pathological conversations.Part one discusses the Erlangen School, which proposed a logical analysis of science as well as an operational reconstruction of psychological concepts. These first chapters provide epistemological and psychological insights into a conceptual reassessment of rational reconstruction from a pragmatic point of view.The second focus is on formal epistemology, where there has recently been a vigorous contribution from experts in epistemic and doxatic logics and an attempt to account for a more realistic, cognitively plausible conception of knowledge.The third part of this book examines the meeting point between logic and the human and social sciences and the fourth part focuses on research at the intersection between linguistics and psychology.Internationally renowned scholars have contributed to this volume, building on the findings and themes relevant to an interdisciplinary scientific project called [NAME] (“Dialogue, Rationality, Formalisms”) which was hosted by the MSH Lorraine (Lorraine Institute for Social Sciences and Humanities) from 2007 to 2011. | <p>Builds on the interdisciplinary scientific project, DiaRaFor (“Dialogue, [NAME], Formalisms”)</p><p>Examines meeting points between different disciplines including logic and the social sciences and offers new insights</p><p>Presents contributions from international experts across various disciplines</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04140-7 | Philosophy | Rosslenbroich | [NAME], University of Witten/Herdecke, Institut für Evolutionsbiologie und Morphologie, Witten, Germany | The Origin of Autonomy and the Major Transitions in Evolution |  | History, Philosophy and Theory of the Life Sciences | 100012 | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 300 p. | 0 | approx. | 139 | Philosophy | Philosophy of Biology | SCE24000 | HP | Evolutionary Biology | SCL21001 | PSAJ | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | Planned | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | What is the outcome of evolution?.- The problem of macroevolutionary trends.- The concept of biological autonomy.- The major transitions in early evolution.- The Cambrian explosion and thereafter.- [NAME] management in animals.- Reproduction.- Nervous systems and the flexibility of movements.- Endothermy.- The evolution of brains and behavior: is there a trend?.- The evolution of man.- Conclusion and implications. | Questions in evolutionary biology are explored in this work on autonomy, including how evolutionary innovations are generated and the origin of new constructional principles and new organs. The volume also scrutinizes the beginning of the major evolutionary transitions including, new structures, new genes, a new environment, a new behavior and new ontogenetic pathways. The first chapters of this book define autonomy and examine the relation of autonomy to adaptation and to niche construction. Later chapters demonstrate how changes in autonomy took place during the major evolutionary transitions and investigate the generation of organs and physiological systems. This work examines the changes generated during macroevolutionary transitions, looking at patterns of innovations and the forces behind them. It shows how a recurring central aspect of macroevolutionary innovations is an increase in individual organismal autonomy, in the sense of an emancipation from the environment with changes in the capacity for flexibility, self-regulation and self-control of behavior. This book synthesizes material from various disciplines including zoology, comparative physiology, morphology, molecular biology, neurobiology and ethology. The text has a clear perspective from the context of systems biology, arguing that the generation of biological autonomy must be interpreted within an “integrative systems approach'. | <p>Provides a systems biology perspective on an interdisciplinary topic </p><p>Examines important questions in evolutionary biology, in depth</p><p>Synthesizes material from many disciplines including zoology, comparative physiology and ethology </p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7901-3 | Philosophy | Tymieniecka | A-T Tymieniecka, The World Phenomenology Institute, Hanover, NH, USA; [NAME], Harvard University, Cambridge, MA, USA; [NAME], Professor Dr. Fuat Sezgin Research Found History of Science in Islam, Istanbul, Turkey | Islamic Philosophy and Occidental Phenomenology in Dialogue | The Logos of Life and Cultural Interlacing | Islamic Philosophy and Occidental Phenomenology in Dialogue | 7 | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 350 p. | 0 | approx. | 139 | Philosophy | Phenomenology | SCE23000 | HPCF3 |  |  |  | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | Planned | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction; Part One; Phenomenology of life and metaphysics; Section One.- Daniela Verducci;  A metamorphic logos for post-metaphysics. From the phenomenology of life.- Section Two.- Salahaddin Khalilov; The effect of illumination on the way back from Aristotle to Plato.- [NAME]; The ‘High Point’ of thought: On the future thrust of all Transcendence.- Section Three.- Konul Bunyadzade; The sources of truth in the history of philosophy.- [NAME]; Necessity and Chance: The metaphysical dilemma.- Part Two.- Comparative and cross-cultural approaches; Section One.-  [NAME]; The seal of philosophy: Tymieniecka’s phenomenology of life versus Islamic metaphysics.- [NAME] ; Confrontation et réconciliation entre l’Islam et l’Occident.-  Section Two.- A.L. Samian; The Question of Divinity in Newton’s and [NAME] philosophies of Mathematics: A comparative perspective.- Semiha Akinci; [NAME] in the twentieth Century.-  Section Three.- Ilona Kock; Ontologization of Ethics or Ethicization of Ontology– a Comparative approach on Plotinus and [NAME] [NAME]; Avicenna and Husserl: Comparative Aspects.- [NAME]; Interpreting the divine word and appropriating a text: The [NAME]-Ricoeur thematic affinity.-  Section Four.- Jad Hatem ; [NAME] et son mirage. L’exegese Druze de Coran 24:39.- Section Five.- Detlev Quintern; ‘[NAME] meets the Logos of Life – A cross-cultural path towards a new Enlightenment. | The contributions, composed in this volume, are inspired not only by the necessity but also by the potentialities of a process which continues and deepens cross-cultural understanding, especially between Islamic and Western philosophy. Following the tradition of an East-Western symphony of thoughts, the authors focus on common horizons and while applying comparative and historical approaches, varieties of unity appear on the ways towards a New Enlightenment. The creative force, orchestrating the harmony in the web of Life, communicates in the mean time with the capacities of human beings, advancing in deciphering its micro-macrocosmic dimensions. Here, the encounter of the Logos of Life Philosophy (A-T. Tymieniecka) and Islamic Philosophy open the space for constructive disputation. In the wake of the crisis of postmodern unknowability, paths towards a new critique of reason go hand in hand with fundamental issues, being reflected newly. | <p>Shows how the quest for shared intuitions of occidental and Islamic spirit yields a rare panorama of human cultural inheritance</p><p>Provides a unique collection of studies, plunging into the spring of human existence and reveals the spiritual source common to the Occidental as well as the Islamic cultures</p><p>Looks at the present times of conflicts in the world and how the sharing of originary affinities calls for human fraternity</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7898-6 | Philosophy | Young | [NAME], York University, Toronto, ON, Canada | Malingering, Feigning, and Response Bias in Psychiatric/ Psychological Injury | Implications for Practice and Court | International Library of Ethics, [NAME], and the New Medicine | 56 | 1 | 2014 | 873 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 873 p. 34 illus. | 0 | final | 279 | Philosophy | Ethics | SCE14000 | HPQ | Clinical Psychology | SCY12005 | MMJ | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Monograph Part A: Psychological Injury, Malingering, [NAME], Assessment.- Section I: Psychological Injury, Malingering, Definitions, Gold Standards, Models.- 1. Introduction: Psychological Injury, Malingering, Ethics, and Law.- 2. Malingering: Definitional and Conceptual Ambiguities and Prevalence or Base Rates.- 3. Toward a Gold Standard in Malingering and Related Determinations.- 4. The MMPI-2-RF Personality Inventory in Psychological Injury Cases.- 5. New Models of Malingering and Related Biases, Presentations, and Performances.- 6. Diagnostic System for Malingered PTSD and Related Response Biases: Details in Tabular Format.- Section II: Malingering Detection, Law, Causality.- 7. Deconstructing Favorable and Unfavorable Malingering-Attribution Perspectives.- 8. Other Contrasting Approaches to Malingering Detection.- 9. Posttraumatic Stress Disorder: Controversies, Diagnosis, and Malingering.- 10. Psychological Injury: Law and Causality.- 11. Leading the Field in Understanding and Testing Malingering and Related Response Styles: The Work of Richard Rogers.- Section III: Psychological Injury, Assessment, Most Recent Literature.- 12. Assessing Psychological Injuries and Malingering: Evaluator Considerations.- 13. Assessing Psychological and Malingering: PTSD and Evaluee Considerations.- 14. Assessing Psychological Injuries and Malingering: Disability and Report Writing.- 15. [NAME] 2012-2013 Revision of the 1999 Slick et al. MND System.- 16. Symptom Validity Assessment, MTBI, and Malingering in Carone and [NAME] (2013).- 17. Most Recent Journal Article Review.- Monograph Part B: Psychological Injury, Malingering, Ethics, Therapy.- Section IV: Psychological Injuries, Therapy, Ethics.- 18. MTBI and Pain.- 19. An Instrument to Detect Pain Feigning: The Pain Feigning Detection Test (PFDT).- 20. Confusions and Confounds in Conversion Disorder.- 21. Therapy in Psychological Injury.- 22. Ethics in Psychological Injury and Law.- 23. A Transdiagnostic Therapeutic Module on Free Will and Change.- 24. A Model of Ethical Thought and Ethical Decision-Making.- Section V: Supplements – Testing, Systems.- 25. Selected Tests and Testing in Psychological Injury Evaluations I.- 26. Selected Tests and Testing in Psychological Injury Evaluations II.- 27. Table 1. Diagnostic System for Malingered PTSD Disability/ Dysfunction and Related Negative Response Biases: User Version and Worksheet.- 28. Table 2. Diagnostic System for Malingered Neurocognitive Disability/ Dysfunction and [NAME] Biases.- 29. Table 3. Diagnostic System for Malingered Pain Disability/ Dysfunction and [NAME]: Terms, Education, Study.- 30. Glossary and Discussion of Terms.- 31. Education.- 32. Study Guide Questions, Teaching Objectives, and [NAME] Outcomes.- 33. PTSD and Malingering: Tests, Diagnostics, Cut-Scores, Cautions.- 34. Book Conclusions | This book is a comprehensive analysis of the definitions, concepts, and recent research on malingering, feigning, and other response biases in psychological injury/ forensic disability populations. It presents a new model of malingering and related biases, and develops a “diagnostic” system based on it that is applicable to PTSD, chronic pain, and TBI. Included are suggestions for effective practice and future research based on the literature reviews and the new systems, which are useful also because they can be used readily by psychiatrists as much as psychologists. | <p>Covers the topic of malingering in psychiatry and psychology</p><p>Includes a comprehensive analysis of the definitions, concepts, and recent research on malingering, feigning, and other response biases in psychological injury/ forensic disability populations</p><p>Gives suggestions for future research based on the reviews and the new systems which can be readily used by psychiatrists and psychologists</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-9459-1 | Psychology | Arulmani | [NAME], The Promise Foundation, Bangalore, India; [NAME], University of Mumbai, Mumbai, India; [NAME], Michigan State University, East Lansing, MI, USA; [NAME], National Institute for Careers Education and Counselling, Cambridge, UK | Handbook of Career Development | International Perspectives | International and Cultural Psychology |  | 1 | 2014 | 898 | Hard cover | Book | XX, 898 p. 20 illus. | 0 | final | 179 | Psychology | Industrial, Organisational and Economic Psychology | [NAME] | JMJ | Developmental Psychology | SCY20010 | JMC | Psychology | Handbook | Springer New York | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | The Manifestation of Career: Introduction and Overview.- Section 1: New Directions in Theoretical Perspectives for Career Development and Guidance.- New Trends in Theory Development in Career Psychology.- Context-Resonant Systems Perspectives in Career Theory.- Life Span Theory and Career Theories: Rapprochement or Estrangement?.- Indigenous Models of Career Development and [NAME] Psychology.- The Cultural Preparation Process Model and [NAME] Development.- [NAME] Ideas for Work, [NAME], and Life.- Section 2: The Person in Contexts across the Life Span.- Personality and Self: Multiple Frames of Reference for Career Service Professionals.- Parental Influences on Youth’s Career Construction.- The Interface between Positive Youth Development and Youth Career Development: New Avenues for Career Guidance Practice.- Mid-Career Progression and Development: The Role for Career Guidance and Counseling.- Section 3: Boom, [NAME], and Suitability: Effective Career Preparation in a Volatile Labor Market.- Understanding the Labor Market: Implications for Career Counseling.- Labor Market and Career Development in the 21st Century.- Career Advice and Guidance in a World where Vocational Skills Matter.- Technical and Vocational Education and [NAME] (TVET) and [NAME]: The Interface.- Second Career: An Eventual Need in Today’s World.- Section 4: Making Our Careers Green: Work, Environmental Sustainability, and Social Justice.- Green Guidance.- Career Guidance for Social Justice in Neoliberal Times.- Educational Inequality and Social Justice: Challenges for Career Guidance.- Career Guidance and Counseling in the Context of Unemployment and Vulnerability: A Case Study of South Africa.- Tensions in Livelihoods: A Rural Perspective.- Traditional Occupations in a Modern World: Career Guidance, Livelihood Planning, and Crafts in the Context of Globalization.- Section 5: Career Services: New Directions for Practice.- [NAME]: Do Narrative Approaches for Career Counseling Count?.- Mind the Twist in the Tale: The Story as a Channel for Culture-Resonant Career Counseling.- Enabling Culturally Sensitive Career Counseling through Critically Reflective Practice: The Role of Reflective Diaries in Personal and Professional Development.- Online Careers Work: Colonist or Inhabitant?.- [NAME]: A Resource for Career Development.- Section 6: Innovations in Career Counseling: Services for Special Groups.- Special Educational Needs, Social Cognitive Environments, and Preparing for the World of Work.- “I Don’t Want to Make Candles!” Supporting the Career Development Needs of those Recovering from Mental Illnesses.- Career Counseling among Indigenous Peoples.- Older Women’s Retrospective Narratives of Their Work and Learning Pathways.- The Immigrant, Expatriate, and Repatriate Experience: How Career Professionals Can Smooth the Way?.- Should I Stay or Should I Go Home? Career Guidance with International Students.- Section 7: Career Services: New Directions for Assessment and Evaluation.- Assessment of Interest and Aptitude: A Methodologically-Integrated Approach.- Making Meaning of Quantitative Assessment in Career Counseling through a Story Telling Approach.- The Assessment of Quality of Working Life in Career Guidance and Counseling.- Evaluation of the Quality of Career Guidance Centers.- Demonstrating the Impact of Career Guidance.- Section 8: Career Services: New Directions for Counselor Training, [NAME], and Standards.- Career Counselor Competencies and Standards: Differences and Similarities across Countries.- Orienting Educators to Contemporary Ideas for Career Counseling: An Illustrative Example.- Training Career Practitioners: Opportunities and [NAME]. | This book is focused on work, occupation and career development: themes that are fundamental to a wide range of human activities and relevant across all cultures. Yet theorizing and model building about this most ubiquitous of human activities from international perspectives have not been vigorous. An examination of the literature pertaining to career development, counseling and guidance that has developed over the last fifty years reveals theorizing and model building have been largely dominated by Western epistemologies, some of the largest workforces in the world are in the developing world. Career guidance is rapidly emerging as a strongly felt need in these contexts. If more relevant models are to be developed, frameworks from other cultures and economies must be recognized as providing constructs that would offer a deeper understanding of career development. This does not mean that existing ideas are to be discarded. Instead, an integrative approach that blends universal principles with particular needs could offer a framework for theorizing, research and practice that has wider relevance. The central objective of this handbook is to draw the wisdom and experiences of different cultures together to consider both universal and specific principles for career guidance and counseling that are socially and economically relevant to contemporary challenges and issues. This book is focused on extending existing concepts to broader contexts as well as introducing new concepts relevant to the discipline of career guidance and counseling. | <p>Extends existing theory, models and methods into wider contexts </p><p>Presents ideas pertaining to lesser explored aspects of career guidance </p><p>Relevant to the wide range of newly emerging career counseling contexts around the world</p> | Professionals | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4939-0307-8 | Psychology | Batthyány | [NAME], University of Vienna, Vienna, Austria; [NAME], University of Haifa, Haifa, Israel | Meaning in Existential and Positive Psychology |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 300 p. | 0 | approx. | 129 | Psychology | Personality and Social Psychology | SCY20050 | JMS | Developmental Psychology | SCY20010 | JMC | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | Planned | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | ​   ​The Existential Functions of Meaning.-When a Meaningless Life is Optimal: An I-D Compensation Perspective.-  Well-Being, Personal Growth, and Meaning in Emerging Motherhood.- Meaning in Life: The Nature, Needs, and Myths.- Review of the myth of Paradise and the vision of the End of Days, demonstrating how they differentially shape our perception of life and their meaning​.- What is Meaning-Centered Positive Psychotherapy (MCCP)?.- Mourning, Meaning, and Memory: Individual, Communal and Cultural Narration of Grief.- Meaning, Medicine, and Healing.- Existential and Positive Psychology: Friend or Foes?.- Meaning in Clinical Disaster Psychology.- A Review and Critique of Theory and Research on the Sense of Meaning and Purpose in Life in the Drinking Career of Alcohol Misusers.- De-reflection technique and its spiritual source.- Beyond happy and sad is to love.- Meaning sensitive psychotherapy: Binding clinical, existential, and positive psychological perspectives.- Embodied tragedy and transcendence: Aging cancer patients speak about life without cancer.- Positive psychology, existential psychology and the persistent presumption of Egoism.- [NAME]: Meaning and [NAME] and Ourselves.- Toward a Humanistic Positive Psychology: Why can't we just get along?. | This book is a first attempt to combine insights from the two perspectives with regard to the question of meaning by examining a collection of theoretical and empirical works. This volume therefore is destined to become an important addition to psych ological literature: both from the viewpoint of the history of ideas (again this would be one of the first times that  positive and existentialist psychologies meet) and from the viewpoint of theoretical and empirical  research into the meaning concept in psychology. | Provides a unique opportunity for discussing important conceptual and empirical issues in both positive and existential psychology fields<br>Stimulates discourse, debate and dialogue on the question of meaning within the frameworks of positive and existential psychology<br>Presents state of the art research and theory of the current interdisciplinary discussion on meaning | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-9641-0 | Psychology | Bull | [NAME], University of Derby, Derby, UK | Investigative Interviewing |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 350 p. 4 illus. | 0 | approx. | 79.95 | Psychology | Psychology Research | SCY20000 | JMB | Psychological Methods/Evaluation | SCY20040 | JMB | Psychology | Professional book | Springer New York | In production | 2014-03-01 00:00:00 |  |  | Investigative interviewing of sex offenders.- Psychological processes underlying true and false confessions.- Cops and question kids in the interrogation room.- Between investigator and suspect: The role of the working alliance in investigative interviewing.- Interview techniques in International Criminal Court and Tribunals.- A training program for investigative interviewing of children.- Success within criminal investigations: Is communication still a key component?.- Investigative interviewing and training: The investigative interviewer apprentice.- When in interviews to disclose information to suspects and to challenge them?.- The inconsistent suspect: A systematic review of different types of consistency in truth tellers and liars.- Human intelligence interviewing and interrogation: Assessing the challenges of developing an ethical, evidence-based approach.- Prosecutors’ perceptions on improving child witness interviews about abuse. | This edited volume reviews the latest research on investigative interviewing in order to provide insights on the psychological processes of the person being interviewed as well as to offer guidelines for conducting credible and useful interviews. Critical and controversial areas are highlighted (eg. false confessions, child interviewing) in order to bring clarity to how these interrogations are to be conducted. Chapters focus on these areas to provide comprehensive views of theoretical, evidence-based background, as well as practical considerations of interrogation settings and procedures. The contributors are internationally respected scholars in the field of psychology and law with particular expertise in the interviews that are critical to legal proceedings. And attention is given to the criminal justice system in international perspective. | <p>Includes qualitative and quantitative research findings </p><p>Provides empirically-based recommendations for interviewers </p><p>Covers cultural considerations in interviewing </p><p>Highlights controversial areas such as false confessions and child interviewing</p> | Professionals | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4939-0276-7 | Psychology | Choi | Tsan-Ming Choi, The Hong Kong Polytechnic University, [NAME], Kowloon, Hong Kong SAR | Fashion Branding and Consumer Behaviors | Scientific Models | International Series on Consumer Science |  | 1 | 2014 | 225 | Hard cover | Book | I, 225 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Psychology | Psychology Research | SCY20000 | JMB | Marketing | SCW23059 | KJS | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- I. Introduction and Review.- Fashion Branding and Consumer Behaviors: An Introduction.- Luxury Fashion Branding: Literature Review, Research Trends and Research Agenda for Scientific Research.- Fashion Brand Personality and Advertisement Response: Incorporating a Symbolic Interactionist Perspective.- II. Analytical Modeling Research.- Optimizing Fashion Branding Strategies: Management of Variety of Items and Length of Lifecycles in a Stochastically Fluctuating Market.- An Analysis of Fashion Brand Extensions by Artificial Neural Networks.- III. Empirical Studies.- “Domestic Made” or “Foreign Made” Luxury Brands? A Comparative Investigation Between Status and Non-Status Seeking Teenagers.- Co-branding in Fast Fashion: the Impact of Consumers’ Need for Uniqueness on [NAME] Perception.- How Brand Awareness Relates to Market Outcome, Brand Equity and the Marketing Mix.- Consumer Perceived Risks Towards Online Group Buying Service for Fashion Apparel Products. | Fashion Branding and Consumer Behaviors presents eye-opening theory, literature review and original research on the mutual influence of branding strategies and consumer response. Contributors use multiple methods to analyze consumers' psychosocial needs and the extent that their fulfillment goes beyond the usefulness or value of the items they purchase as well as the fashion industry's means of communicating brand identity and enhancing brand loyalty. Along the way, these studies raise important questions about consumer behaviors, consumer welfare, environmental ethics and the future of consumer research. Included in the coverage: A symbolic interactionist perspective on fashion brand personality and advertisement response.Optimizing fashion branding strategies in a fluctuating market.An analysis of fashion brand extensions by artificial neural networks.Domestic or foreign luxury brands? A comparison of status-  and non-status- seeking teenagers.The impact of consumers’ need for uniqueness on purchase perception.How brand awareness relates to market outcome, brand equity and the marketing mix. A breakthrough volume on the complexities of how and why we buy, Fashion Branding and Consumer Behaviors will captivate researchers and practitioners in the fields of consumer psychology, marketing and economics. | <p>Covers fashion branding from a consumer behaviors perspective </p><p>Includes theoretical and applied research results </p><p>Provides both analytical and empirical models</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-9604-5 | Psychology | Cordella | [NAME], Monash University, Caulfield, VIC, Australia; [NAME], Monash University, Caulfield, VIC, Australia | Behavioural Oncology | Psychological, Communicative, and Social Dimensions |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 780 | Hard cover | Book | XVI, 780 p. 70 illus., 30 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 179 | Psychology | Health Psychology | SCY12020 | MBNH9 | Public Health | SCH27002 | MBN | Psychology | Monograph | Springer New York | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- The behavioural dimension of cancer and sickness.- Psychology and cancer.-The existential dimension of cancer.- The social dimension of cancer.- Language and the cross-cultural dimension of cancer.-Communication between doctor and cancer patient.- Complementary psychological therapies. | Medical, educational, and public health efforts have reduced the spread of many major diseases, yet cancer perseveres, in spite of continuing research and improvements in practice. Especially promising among therapeutic strategies are ones that recognise patients as individuals with thoughts, feelings--and speech.Rooted in deep understanding of the mutual relationship between behavior and cancer, Behavioural Oncology combines extensive clinical wisdom and empirical data to illuminate the psychological, social, and existential aspects of cancer, and to offer a framework for empathic, patient-centered care. Chapters delve into the psychobiology of long-term illness, examining stress, pain, fatigue, sensory and sleep disturbances, and other quality of life issues as well as considerations of age, gender, culture, and comorbidity. The book's emphasis on linguistic and communicative aspects of cancer--and practical skills from respecting patient narratives to delivering bad news--adds necessary depth to concepts of the therapeutic relationship. In this way, the authors warn about overmedicalizing cases to the point of losing patient identity. Major areas of the coverage include:Biology and behavior in cancer prevention and suppression.The psychology of cancer patients: emotions, cognition, and personalitySocial dimensions, including stigma, coping, and social supportLanguage, communication, and cross-cultural issuesExistential, spiritual, and end-of-life concernsDoctor-patient relationshipsThe psychological benefits of complementary therapiesBringing new scope and substance to familiar mind/body constructs, Behavioural [NAME] is a definitive reference for a spectrum of healthcare professionals, among them health and clinical psychologists, oncologists and family physicians, oncology nurses, and clinical social workers. Its discussion questions and summaries make it a suitable text for undergraduate and graduate courses in related topics. | <p>Combines expertise of a linguist specializing in doctor-patient communication and discourse analysis with that of a behavioral biologist with expertise in disease evolution </p><p>Chapters include a summary of main conclusions and a list of topics for discussion</p><p>Fuses knowledge of biology, psychology, and social science into the understanding of the behavioral aspects of cancer patients</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-94-017-8668-3 | Psychology | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Bologna, Bologna, Italy; [NAME], University of Bologna, Bologna, Italy | Increasing Psychological Well-being in Clinical and Educational Settings | Interventions and Cultural Contexts | Cross-Cultural Advancements in Positive Psychology | 8 | 1 | 2014 | 200 | Hard cover | Book | 200 p. | 0 | approx. | 139 | Psychology | Cross Cultural Psychology | SCY20100 | JMH | Quality of Life Research | SCX23000 | JFF | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | Planned | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- Chapter 1. Culture and the Promotion of Well-Being in East and West; [NAME], [NAME] and Yuri Miyamoto.- Chapter 2. The Individualized and Cross-Cultural Roots of Well-Being Therapy; [NAME] and [NAME] Chapter 3. The Place of Psychological Well-Being in Cognitive Therapy; [NAME] and [NAME] Luzon.- Chapter 4. Posttraumatic Growth: Challenges from a Cross-Cultural Viewpoint; [NAME], [NAME] and Christian Ochoa.- Chapter 5. [NAME] and Well-Being with Wisdom and [NAME]; [NAME] Linden.- Chapter 6. Increasing Psychological Well-Being through Hypnosis; Tharina Guse.- Chaper 7. The Role of Motivation in Cognitive Behavioural [NAME] for Anxiety Disorders; [NAME], Carolina Blaya and [NAME] Manfro.- Chapter 8. The Role of Psychological Well-Being in Childhood Interventions; [NAME] and [NAME] Visani.- Chapter 9. Well-Being and Resilience in School Settings; [NAME] and Helen McGrath.- Chapter 10. Strength Based Resilience: Integrating Risk and Resources towards Holistic Well-Being; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and Alexandra Love.- Chapter 11. School Programs for Prevention of Mental Health Problems and the Promotion of Psychological Well-Being in Children; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] 12. The Promotion of Hope in Children and Youth; [NAME] and Shane J. Lopez.- Chapter 13. Life Satisfaction in Youth; Carmel Proctor and [NAME]. | This volume deals with strategies aimed at increasing psychological well-being in both clinical and non-clinical settings, with a special focus on the impact of cross-cultural influences on these processes. Consisting of two parts, the book first examines clinical interventions for increasing well-being and positive functioning in adult populations. It looks at cultural differences in the experience of psychological well-being, presents an analysis of the concept of psychological well-being and discusses various interventions, including Well-Being Therapy and Cognitive Behavioral Therapy. Other concepts discussed are post-traumatic growth, wisdom and motivation.The second part of the book deals with psychological interventions in childhood and adolescence and has a strong emphasis on educational settings. It provides an overview of the main evidence-based psychotherapies for affective disorders in youths, and looks at the importance and impact of positive education, resilience, and hope. The book presents models for intervention and discusses several therapies in detail. | <p>Discusses a neglected aspect in psychotherapy research: cultural diversity</p><p>Presents and examines many therapies and interventions in a variety of settings</p><p>Approaches the topic from biological, psychological, and social perspectives</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-9401-0 | Psychology | Griffith | [NAME], The Florida Institute of Technology, Melbourne, FL, USA; [NAME], North Carolina State University, Raleigh, NC, USA; [NAME], The Florida Institute of Technology, Melbourne, FL, USA | Internationalizing the Curriculum in Organizational Psychology |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 338 | Hard cover | Book | XXX, 338 p. | 0 | final | 179 | Psychology | Industrial, Organisational and Economic Psychology | [NAME] | JMJ | Cross Cultural Psychology | SCY20100 | JMH | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | Available | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 | 2013-11-26 00:00:00 |  | Expect Surprises: I-O and the Global Business Environment.- [NAME] and opportunities to developing South-North program partnerships.- The Science of a Global Organizational Psychology: Differing Approaches and Assumptions.- Educational Approaches Across Cultures: Consequences for International IO Programs.- An Integrated International Learning Model for Internationalizing I/O Psychology Programs.- Teaching and Learning Work, Organization and Personnel Psychology Internationally: The Erasmus Mundus Program.- Preparing Global Managers and Consultants: A Justification and Framework for International Exchange Programs in Higher Education.- I/O Cross-Cultural Competencies: Enhancing Creativity and Innovation in Organizations.- Developing Successful Global Contracts.- Training and Retraining I-O Psychology Faculty for Internationalization.- The Making of Generation G: Education and Collaborative Teaching to Create the Next Generation of International Work and Organizational Psychologists.- International Collaboration Experience (ICE): Using Multi-Country Student Projects to Enhance Learning and Faculty Research.- Challenges of Conducting Global Research.- Doing Research in International Organizations. | This book assembles state-of-the-art thinking on the internationalization of the curriculum of training centers in I/O and Work Psychology. The experts contributing chapters share their thoughts on the knowledge and skills that students must master in the 21st century, as well as their research on how we can develop students to be globally perceptive, culturally competent working professionals. Chapters cover a full range of topics such as: the scope of subject matter and content, learning objectives and outcomes, global competencies, co-curricular activities, experiential learning and the tacit curriculum, while curriculum development must stem from the philosophy of each institution, these philosophies may diverge in focus (e.g. science versus practice) and outcomes (e.g. jobs versus mastery). Therefore, the goal of the book is not to prescribe a particular curriculum, but rather to provide insight on possible curriculum elements that may be customized for use by training institutions. | Addresses the needs of a globalizing organizational environment<br>Provides insights for creating consistent standards<br>Identifies critical curriculum elements<br>International experts [NAME], [NAME], and [NAME] present their research<br>Describes model programs<br>Explores faculty training issues<br> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-3-319-03481-2 | Psychology | Hodgson | [NAME], East Carolina University, Greenville, NC, USA; [NAME], East Carolina University, Greenville, NC, USA; [NAME], University of Minnesota, Saint Paul, MN, USA; [NAME], Brigham Young University, Provo, UT, USA | Medical [NAME] | Advanced Applications |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 300 p. | 0 | approx. | 59.99 | Psychology | Clinical Psychology | SCY12005 | MMJ | Family | [NAME] | JHBK | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | Planned | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- Preface.- A Review of Medical Family Therapy: 30 Years of History, Growth and Research.- Medical Family Therapy: Charting a Course in Competencies.- Preparing to be a Medical Family Therapist: Bridging the Multiple Worlds of Health Care.- Medical Family Therapy in Integrated Primary Care: An Interactional Framework.- Building Relationships in Integrated Care.- Working with Providers and Healthcare Systems Experiencing Compassion Fatigue and Burnout.- MedFT Supervision in Context.- Preparing for Leadership Roles in Healthcare Settings.- The Medical Family Therapist as Transdisciplinary Trainer.- Honoring the “Spirituality” in Biopsychosocial-Spiritual Health Care: Medical Family Therapists on the Frontlines of Graduate Education, Clinical Practice and Research.- Medical Family Therapy Scientist-Practitioners.- Advancing Medical Family Therapy Through Qualitative, Quantitative and [NAME] Engaging Communities as Partners in Research: Advancing Integrated Care through Purposeful Partnerships.- A Primer in Program Evaluation for MedFTs Dissemination and Implementation Science: Research for the Real World Medical Family Therapist.- Advancing Health Equity in Medical Family Therapy Research.- Policy and Practice: A Primer on the Past, Present and Future of Healthcare Reform in the United States.- Family Therapists in Primary Care Settings: Opportunities for Integration through Advocacy.- The Ethics of Integration: Where Policy and Practice Collide.- How to Prepare a Medical Family Therapy Policy Brief.- A Summary Report of Cost-Effectiveness: Recognizing the Value of Family Therapy in Healthcare.- Getting Reimbursed for MedFT: Financial Models Toward Sustainability.- Epilogue. | Integrated, interdisciplinary health care is growing in stature and gaining in numbers. Systems and payers are facilitating it. Patients and providers are benefitting from it. Research is supporting it, and policymakers are demanding it.The emerging field of Medical [NAME] (MedFT) is contributing greatly to these developments and Medical Family Therapy: Advanced Applications examines its implementation in depth. Leading experts describe MedFT as it is practiced today, the continuum of services provided, the necessary competencies for practitioners and the biological, psychological, social and spiritual aspects of health that the specialty works to integrate. Data-rich chapters model core concepts such as the practitioner as scientist, the importance of context in health care settings, collaboration with families and communities and the centrality of the relational perspective in treatment. And the book's wide-spectrum coverage takes in research, training, financial and policy issues, among them:Preparing MedFTs for the multiple worlds of health careExtending platforms on how to build relationships in integrated careOffering a primer in program evaluation for MedFTsEnsuring health equity in MedFT researchIdentifying where policy and practice collide with ethics and integrated careRecognizing the cost-effectiveness of family therapy in health careWith its sophisticated insights into the current state – and the future – of healthcare reform, Medical Family Therapy: Advanced Applications is essential reading for researchers and practitioners in the fields of clinical psychology, counseling, family therapy, healthcare policy, psychiatric nursing, psychiatry, public health and social work.This is a much needed and long-awaited book as the field of medical family therapy reaches its current level of maturity. The authors are respected clinicians and researchers in the area and they share their expertise and wisdom in this book with elegance. An impressively practical book that is likely to become a very useful resource for all those looking for a “go to” book in this area! - Sy Saeed, MD, MS, FACPsych Professor and Chairman Department of Psychiatric Medicine Brody School of Medicine East Carolina University Editor-in-Chief Journal of Psychiatric Administration and Management (JPAM)As we seek to implement a medical system that meets the needs of all families, it is critical that we delineate and understand the skills, tasks and opportunities at every level of the healthcare process. Medical Family Therapists are at the core of this endeavor with a unique blend of clinical, organizational and leadership talents. More and more, these professionals are being invited to the table where they remind us to consider the family, and attend to the relationships within and between all involved in the delivery of efficient and effective care. This book guides the Medical Family Therapist as they step into these roles of influencing the influencers. It is a must read to understand the further complexities of the healthcare puzzle and the roles played in shaping a healthcare system that can both financially and physically heal us. - Tina Schermer Sellers, PhD, LMFT  Department of Marriage & Family Therapy Seattle Pacific University Seattle, Washington High praise to Hodgson, Lamson, Mendenhall, and [NAME] and in creating a seminal work for systemic researchers, educators, supervisors, policy makers and financial experts in health care. The comprehensiveness and innovation explored by every author reflects an in depth understanding that reveals true pioneers of integrated health care. Medical [NAME]: Advances in Application will lead | <p>Reviews the literature covering almost 30 years of history, growth and available research on MedFT</p><p>Outlines steps for responding to providers and systems experiencing burnout and compassion fatigue</p><p>Describes concrete strategies for MedFTs to effectively integrate themselves into medical contexts</p><p>Offers recommendations for future research directions</p> | Professionals | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4899-8082-3 | Psychology | Klonoff | [NAME], St. Joseph's Hospital and Medical Center, Phoenix, AZ, USA | Psychotherapy for Families after Brain Injury |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 400 p. 23 illus. | 0 | approx. | 129 | Psychology | Neuropsychology | [NAME] | JMM | Psychiatry | SCH53003 | MMH | Psychology | Professional book | Springer US | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction and Overview.- Families’ Early Sessions, Emotional Status, and Treatment Themes.- The Impact of Brain Injury on Different Family Members.- Family Psychotherapy after Moderate to Severe Traumatic Brain Injury.- [NAME] for Concussions and the Postconcussive Syndrome.- Family Psychotherapy after [NAME] and [NAME] Injury.- [NAME] after a Brain Tumor.- [NAME] for Seizure Disorders.- Family Group.- Loved Ones’ End of Life and Existential Considerations as a Caregiver.- Aftercare Group for Long Range Needs. | Whether caused by illness, accident, or incident, brain injury requires multi-tiered  resources for the patient and considerable external care and support.  When recovery is sidelined by depression, anger, grief, or turmoil, family members and the support network have critical roles to play and need their own guidance and compassionate therapeutic interventions. [NAME] for Families after Brain Injury offers theoretical frameworks and eclectic techniques for working effectively with adult patients and their families at the initial, active, and post-treatment phases of rehabilitation. This practical reference clarifies roles and relationships of the support network in interfacing with the loved one and addresses the understandably devastating and sometimes derailing emotions and psychosocial adversities.  The content promotes psychoeducation and guided exercises, delineates “helpful hints” and coping tools, and proffers multimedia resources to overcome hurdles.  Constructs of awareness, acceptance, and realism for all parties are woven throughout, along with ideas to enhance the support network’s commitment, adjustment, positivity, hope, and longevity.  Case excerpts, instructive quotes from caregivers, and nuggets of clinical advice assist in analyzing these and other topics in salient detail: The impact of brain injury on different family members.Treatment themes in early family sessions.Family therapy for moderate to severe brain injury, concussion, and postconcussion syndrome.Family therapy after organic brain injury: stroke, anoxia, tumor, seizure disorders.Family group treatment during active rehabilitation.End-of-life and existential considerations and positive aspects of caregiving.Aftercare group therapy for long-term needs. The hands-on approach demonstrated in Psychotherapy for Families after Brain Injury will enhance the demanding work of a range of professionals, including neuropsychologists, clinical psychologists, rehabilitation psychologists, family therapists, marriage and family counselors, psychiatrists, behavioral/mental health counselors, clinical social workers, rehabilitation specialists such as speech-language pathologists, physical, and occupational therapists, and graduate students in the helping professions. | <p>Family therapy for diverse neurological populations and family configurations</p><p>Theoretical/conceptual overview and a wealth of hands-on treatment techniques</p><p>Includes case studies and holistic treatment approaches</p><p>Includes handouts for clinicians and family members</p> | Professionals | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4899-8028-1 | Psychology | Lancioni | [NAME], University of Bari, [NAME], Italy; [NAME], Georgia Regents University, Augusta, GA, USA | Assistive Technologies for People with Diverse Abilities |  | Autism and Child Psychopathology Series |  | 1 | 2014 | 576 | Hard cover | Book | XIII, 576 p. 8 illus. | 0 | final | 179 | Psychology | Developmental Psychology | SCY20010 | JMC | Rehabilitation Medicine | SCH55030 | MQV | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1. Assistive Technologies for Improving Quality of Life; [NAME], [NAME] 2. Assistive Technology for People with Acquired Brain Injury; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME]. Assistive Technology for Postsecondary Students with Disabilities; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] O’Reilly.- Chapter 4. Assistive Technology for People with Communication Disorders; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] 5. Assistive Technology for Students with Visual Impairments and [NAME]; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] 6. Assistive Technology for People with Autism Spectrum Disorders; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] O’Reilly.- Chapter 7. Assistive Technology for People with Behavior Problems; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Gevarter.- Chapter 8. Assistive Technology For People With Alzheimer’s Disease; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Winton.- Chapter 9. Assistive Technology for Individuals with Learning Disabilities; [NAME], [NAME], Min Wook Ok.- Chapter 10. Assistive Technology for People with Severe/Profound Intellectual and Multiple Disabilities; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME]. | The familiar image of the disabled tends to emphasize their limitations and reduced quality of life. However, many people with cognitive, motor, and other difficulties also have the capacity to enhance their social interactions, leisure pursuits and daily activities with the aid of assistive technology. Assistive devices from the simple to the sophisticated, have become essential to intervention programs for this population. And not surprisingly the numbers of devices available are growing steadily.Assistive Technologies for People with Diverse Abilities offers expert analysis of pertinent issues coupled with practical discussion of solutions for effective support. Its comprehensive literature review describes current and emerging devices and presents evidence-based guidelines for matching promising technologies to individuals. Program outcomes are assessed, as are their potential impact on the future of the field. In addition, chapters provide detailed descriptions of the personal and social needs of the widest range of individuals with congenital and acquired conditions, including: Acquired brain damage.Communication impairment.Attention and learning difficulties (with special focus on college students).Visual impairment and blindness.Autism spectrum disorders.Behavioral and occupational disorders.Alzheimer's disease.Severe, profound and multiple impairments.The scope and depth of coverage makes Assistive Technologies for People with Diverse Abilities an invaluable resource for researchers, professionals and graduate students in developmental psychology, rehabilitation medicine, educational technology, occupational therapy, speech pathology and clinical psychology. | <p>Examines assistive technology interventions from multidisciplinary perspectives across nine areas of disability</p><p>Explores the development and use of adaptive devices, software and services to enhance engagement, learning and quality of life for people with diverse abilities</p><p>Explains how technology is used across such areas as communication, leisure, education, independent living, food preparation and mobility</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-9607-6 | Psychology | Lewis | [NAME], Rutgers University, New Brunswick, NJ, USA; [NAME], University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign, Champaign, IL, USA | Handbook of Developmental Psychopathology |  |  |  | 3 | 2014 | 1120 | Hard cover | Book | XX, 1120 p. 28 illus., 6 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 349 | Psychology | Developmental Psychology | SCY20010 | JMC | Psychiatry | SCH53003 | MMH | Psychology | Handbook | Springer US | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I. ISSUES AND THEORIES.- 1. Toward the Development of the Science of Developmental Psychopathology.- 2. A Dialectic Integration of Development for the Study of Psychopathology.- 3. Nature-Nurture Integration.- 4. Developmental, Quantitative, and Multicultural Assessment of Psychopathology.- 5. Developmental Epidemiology.- 6. Modeling Strategies in Developmental Psychopathology Research: Prediction of Individual Change.- 7. Resilience and Positive Psychology.- Part II. CONTEXT AND PSYCHOPATHOLOGY.- 8. Family Context in the Development of Psychopathology.- 9. Schooling and the Mental Health of Children and Adolescents in the United States.- 10. [NAME] and the Development of Psychopathology.- 11. The Influence of Stressors on the Development of Psychopathology.- 12. Culture and Developmental Psychopathology.- Part III. NEUROSCIENCE AND PSYCHOPATHOLOGY.- 13. Developmental Behavioral Genetics.- 14. Functional Magnetic Resonance Imaging in Developmental Psychopathology: The Brain as a Window into the Development and Treatment of Psychopathology.- 15. The Contributions of Early Experience to Biological Development and Sensitivity to Context.- 16. Temperament Concepts in Developmental Psychopathology.- 17. Puberty as a Developmental Context of Risk for Psychopathology.- Part IV. EARLY CHILDHOOD [NAME]. Attachment Disorders: Theory, Research, and Treatment Considerations.- 19. Early Deprivation and Developmental Psychopathology.- 20. Prematurity and Failure to Thrive: The Interplay of Medical Conditions and Development.- 21. Sleep Interventions: A Developmental Perspective.- Part V. DISRUPTIVE BEHAVIOR [NAME]. A Developmental Perspective on Attention Deficit/Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD).- 23. A Developmental Model of Aggression and Violence: Microsocial and Macrosocial Dynamics within an Ecological Framework.- 24. Conduct Disorder.- Part VI. EMOTIONAL DISORDERS.- 25. Depression in Children and Adolescents.- 26. A Developmental Model of Self-Inflicted Injury, Borderline Personality, and Suicide Risk.- 27. The Developmental Psychopathology of Anxiety.- 28. Obsessions and Compulsions: The Developmental and [NAME] Context.- Part VII. CONTROL DISORDERS.- 29. Alcoholism: A Life Span Perspective on Etiology and Course.- 30. The Epidemiology and Etiology of Adolescent Substance Use in Developmental Perspective.- 31. Developmental Trajectories of Disordered Eating: Genetic and Biological Risk during Puberty.- 32. Enuresis and Encopresis: The Elimination Disorders.- Part VIII. CHRONIC DEVELOPMENTAL [NAME] 33. Autism Spectrum Disorder: Developmental Approaches from Infancy through Early Childhood.- 34. Intellectual Disability.- 35. Gender Dysphoria.- 36. Personality Pathology.- Part IX. [NAME] 37. A Developmental Psychopathology Perspective on Child Maltreatment.- 38. Posttraumatic Stress Disorder in Children and Adolescents.- 39. [NAME] in Children and Adolescents. | When developmental psychologists set forth the theory that the roots of adult psychopathology could be traced to childhood experience and behavior, the idea quickly took hold. Subsequently, as significant research in this area advanced during the past decade, more sophisticated theory, more accurate research methodologies, and improved replication of empirical findings have been the result.The Third Edition of the Handbook of Developmental Psychopathology incorporates these research advances throughout its comprehensive, up-to-date examination of this diverse and maturing field. Integrative state-of-the-art models document the complex interplay of risk and protective factors and other variables contributing to normal and pathological development. New and updated chapters describe current refinements in assessment methods and offer the latest research findings from neuroscience. In addition, the Third Edition provides readers with a detailed review across the spectrum of salient topics, from the effects of early deprivation to the impact of puberty.As the field continues to shift from traditional symptom-based concepts of pathology to a contemporary, dynamic paradigm, the Third Edition addresses such key topics as:Early childhood disorders, including failure to thrive and attachment disorders.Aggression, ADHD, and other disruptive conditions.Developmental models of depression, anxiety, self-injury/suicide, and OCD.The autism spectrum and other chronic developmental disorders.Substance abuse, eating, and other disorders of control. Child maltreatment and trauma disorders.The Third Edition of the Handbook of Developmental Psychopathology is a discipline-defining, forward-looking resource for researchers, clinicians, scientist-practitioners, and graduate students in such fields as developmental psychology, psychiatry, social work, child and school psychology, educational psychology, and pediatrics. | <p>Integrates state-of-the-art theory and empirical research across multidisciplinary perspectives </p><p>Examines molecular genetics and epigenetics, brain imaging, and early experience in development of biological systems</p><p>Elucidates processes underlying resilience</p><p>Integrates theory/research on early temperament, personality, psychopathology</p><p>Addresses effects of early deprivation on cognitive, emotional, biological systems </p><p>Provides comprehensive coverage of disorders corresponding to the forthcoming DSM-V</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-9413-3 | Psychology | Lowenthal | [NAME], University of Mons, Mons, Belgium; Laurent Lefebvre, University of Mons, Mons, Belgium | Language and Recursion |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 232 | Hard cover | Book | XIX, 232 p. 20 illus., 10 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Psychology | Cognitive Psychology | SCY20060 | JMR | Psycholinguistics | SCN35000 | CFD | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | Available | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 | 2013-11-26 00:00:00 |  | Section 1: What is recursion?.- Chapter I : Pragmatics as the origin of recursion.- Chapter II : Investigating recursion within a domain-specific framework.- Chapter III : Recursive cognition as a prelude to language.- Section 2 : Non Verbal Communication Devices, Implicit learning, Language and Recursion.- Chapter IV : Non Verbal Communication Devices, Language, Cerebral Flexibility and Recursive Exercises.- Chapter V : Computer simulations of recursive exercises for a Non-Verbal Communication Device.- Chapter VI : Implicit learning and recursion.- Section 3 : Emergence of Grammar in human and non human animal communication.- Chapter VII : Early rule learning ability and language acquisition.- Chapter VIII : Is there a brain basis of recursion ?.- Chapter IX : Primate communication: meaning from strings of calls.- Section 4 : About formal grammars and artificial Intelligence.- Chapter X : Unification and Efficient Computation in The Minimalist Program.- Chapter XI : Recursion in generative grammar.- Chapter XII : Computational Language Related to Recursion, Incursion and Fractal.- Section 5 : Philosophy, recursion and language.- Chapter XIII : Consciousness, Recursion and Language.- Chapter XIV : There is no recursion in language.- Section 5 : Synthesis of main discussions. | As humans, our many levels of language use distinguish us from the rest of the animal world. For many scholars, it is the recursive aspect of human speech that makes it truly human. But linguists continue to argue about what recursion actually is, leading to the central dilemma: is full recursion, as defined by mathematicians, really necessary for human language? Language and Recursion defines the elusive construct with the goal of furthering research into language and cognition. An up-to-date literature review surveys extensive findings based on non-verbal communication devices and neuroimaging techniques. Comparing human and non-human primate communication, the book’s contributors examine meaning in chimpanzee calls, and consider the possibility of a specific brain structure for recursion. The implications are then extended to formal grammars associated with artificial intelligence, and to the question of whether recursion is a valid concept at all. Among the topics covered: • The pragmatic origins of recursion. • Recursive cognition as a prelude to language. • Computer simulations of recursive exercises for a non-verbal communication device. • Early rule learning ability and language acquisition. • Computational language related to recursion, incursion, and fractals • Why there may be no recursion in language. Regardless of where one stands in the debate, Language and Recursion has much to offer the science community, particularly cognitive psychologists and researchers in the science of language. By presenting these multiple viewpoints, the book makes a solid case for eventual reconciliation. | <p>Bridges the gap between theoretical cognitive sciences and applied neuro- and psycholinguistics </p><p>All chapters include a synthesis of discussions</p><p>Contains high-quality and contemporary, relevant scientific information provided by renowned experts</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-3-319-03247-4 | Psychology | [NAME] | [NAME], Santa Fe, NM, USA; [NAME], Princeton, NJ, USA | Critical Topics in Family Therapy | AFTA Monograph Series Highlights | AFTA SpringerBriefs in Family Therapy |  | 1 | 2014 | 161 | Soft cover | Book | XXII, 161 p. 26 illus. | 0 | final | 54.99 | Psychology | Clinical Psychology | SCY12005 | MMJ | Family | [NAME] | JHBK | Psychology | Brief | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | ​Introduction and Overview.- Families in the War Zone: Narratives of “Me” and the “Other” in the Course of Therapy.- Reflections on Growing Up in a War Zone: Understanding War and Building Peace.-  Fresh Start for Families: A collaboratively-build Community –based program for families that are homeless.- Constructing Empowerment and Resilience Contexts: Systemic Interventions in Communities.- [NAME] and Changes to Family Therapy Practice in South Africa.- Nuestra Casa [Our Home]: From the Family to the Community.- Helping Children Heal After the Hurricanes: An Innovative Training Approach.- “News From Neuroscience: Applications to Couple therapy”.- Neurobiology and Addiction: Assisting the Family and Support System to Get Resistant Loved Ones Into Treatment.- Doing Family: Decentering Heteronormativity in “Marriage” and “Family” Therapy.- Families in Transition: Supporting Families of Transgender Youth.- Erotic Fantasy Reconsidered: From Tragedy to Triumph.- Couples and [NAME]: The Need for a New Therapeutic Approach.- Open Relationships: A Culturally and Clinically Sensitive Approach. | This Brief from the American Family Therapy Academy (AFTA) is a collection of chapters from the AFTA Monograph Series. The chapters specifically address responses to a wide range of contextual phenomena from a relational family therapy perspective. Chapters are grounded in family systems concepts and informed by postmodern perspectives including social justice. The collection provides cutting edge thinking and practices for a variety of experiences that strongly impact individuals and families. Authors address the treatment of couples and families oppressed by socio-contextual phenomena such as war and poverty, and of those marginalized by the insidious impact of dominant discourse on relationships and on the therapeutic context, for example, sexual/gender identity and sexual practices. Established practitioners and scholars with particular expertise in the areas addressed bring exceptional transparency and knowledge to the descriptions of their work. Researchers, clinicians, educators, and students of family and couples therapy will find this volume very useful. | <p>Presents clinical implications of families dealing with a broad range of traumatic situations</p><p>Draws from members of the American Family Therapy Academy</p><p>Written from a relational perspective </p> | Professionals | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-94-017-8653-9 | Psychology | Pedrotti | [NAME], California Polytechnic State University, San Luis Obispo, CA, USA; [NAME], Marquette University, Milwaukee, WI, USA | Perspectives on the Intersection of Multiculturalism and Positive Psychology |  | Cross-Cultural Advancements in Positive Psychology | 7 | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 250 p. | 0 | approx. | 139 | Psychology | Positive Psychology | SCY44000 | [NAME] | Quality of Life Research | SCX23000 | JFF | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | Planned | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  | worldwide | Foreword; [NAME]; [NAME] and [NAME] and Research Issues.- Chapter 1. History of Cultural Context in Positive Psychology: We Finally Come to the Start of the Journey; [NAME] and [NAME]. Broad Definitions of Culture in the Field of Positive Psychology; [NAME] and [NAME] 3. Multicultural Considerations in Measurement and Classifications of Positive Psychology; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME]. Methodological Issues in Positive Psychology Research with Diverse Populations: Exploring Strengths among Chinese Adults; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Shih.- Part II. Specific Constructs.- Chapter 5. Affective Well-Being Viewed through a Lens of Race and Ethnicity; [NAME] Chapter 6. Cognitive Constucts in the Context of Positive Psychology; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Chapter 7. Relationships in Multicultural Contexts; [NAME] and [NAME] Shenhav.- Part III. Specific Populations.- Chapter 8. Positive Psychology across the Lifespan; [NAME], [NAME], Brittany Branand, Pi-Ju Liu, [NAME] and [NAME] Chan.- Chapter 9. Positive Psychology and [NAME]; [NAME] and Rebekah Smart.- Chapter 10 Religion, Spirituality and Positive Psychology: Strengthening Well-Being; [NAME] and [NAME] Pargament.- Chapter 11. Social Class Mobility and Positive Psychology; [NAME] and [NAME] Shogren.- chapter 13. Positive Psychology and LGBTQ Populations; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME]. Applications of Positive Psychology in Multicultural Contexts.- Chapter 14. Positive Psychological Practices in Multicultural School Settings; [NAME] and [NAME] 15. A Positive Approach to Multiculturalism and Diversity Management in the Workplace; [NAME] and [NAME] 16. Infusing Multiculturalism and Positive Psychology in Psychotherapy; [NAME] Part V. Conclusion.- Chapter 17. Future Directions for a More Multiculturally Competent (and Humble) Positive Psychology; [NAME] and [NAME]. | The volume will be a collection of chapters about current theory, research, and practice related to multiculturalism and positive psychology. This book will serve as a reference to any who are interested in the intersection of positive psychology and multicultural context. While many in the field of positive psychology have begun to move more strongly towards a culturally-embedded approach that recognizes the importance of context in discussing, viewing, and cultivating strengths in individuals from different backgrounds, there is still a dearth of research in this area compared with studies that take a cross-cultural approach (comparing people from different countries) or one that is purported to be “culture-free” or universal in its application. While it is becoming more common to see various articles or chapters published on these topics, there is still no comprehensive text aimed at discussion of the collection of these topics presented in a cohesive and structured way. This book aims to fill this gap in the literature. In this book, a broad definition of culture is utilized that includes such facets as race, ethnicity, socioeconomic or social class status, disability, religion, sexual orientation, and gender. This book is intended to present research, theory, and suggestions for practice that are grounded in diverse cultural contexts and current scholarship. It will assist researchers, students, and practitioners who are studying and working within diverse populations. Currently there exists no comprehensive text that addresses the intersection of positive psychology and multiculturalism. Several edited volumes address positive psychology constructs (e.g., well-being, optimal experience, autonomy) across cultures, but they do not focus on multicultural populations within the United States. Other books focus more specifically on mental health applications and stress and coping among multicultural populations, however these books do not provide a broad perspective on psychology beyond this application piece. The proposed book will review current theory and research about constructs in addition to applications across contexts. Finally, other published books have focused on youth within multicultural society; this volume is more broad in its address of issues of positive psychology across the lifespan and across various aspects of identity including disability, gender, social class, and sexual orientation. | <p>The first comprehensive book addressing the intersection of positive psychology and multiculturalism with a focus on diverse populations within the United States</p><p>Review of current theory and research about positive psychological constructs within a cultural context in addition to applications for various areas of practice</p><p>Offers a broad and inclusive discussion of various aspects of identity and positive psychology</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-9508-6 | Psychology | Rhee | Soo [NAME], Institute of Behavioral Genetics, Boulder, CO, USA; [NAME], University of London, London, UK | Behavior Genetics of Psychopathology |  | Advances in Behavior Genetics | 2 | 1 | 2014 | 546 | Hard cover | Book | VI, 546 p. 14 illus., 8 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Psychology | Psychology Research | SCY20000 | JMB | Human Genetics | SCB12008 | MFN | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder: insight from quantitative genetic research.- Progress in understanding the causes of autism spectrum disorders and autistic traits: Twin studies from 1977 to the present day.- Genetic influences on depression and anxiety in childhood and adolescence.- Evidence for Meaningful Etiological Distinctions within the Broader Construct of Antisocial Behavior.-  Sleep and Psychopathology: Quantitative and Molecular Genetic Research on Comorbidity.-Schizophrenia and Bipolar Disorder.- Genetics of Substance Use Disorders.-Behavioral genetic approaches to understand the etiology of [NAME] (GxE) in Behavioral Genetics.-Epigenetics of Psychopathology.- Future Directions  In Genetics Of Psychiatric Disorders.- | As a dynamic, interdisciplinary field, behavior genetics and its evolution are being followed closely by scientists across the psychological and medical domains. The discoveries surrounding the human genome and the advancement in molecular genetic technologies have  led to studies becoming increasingly sophisticated and yielding  yet more conclusive and useful results. This is certainly the case in the area of child and adult psychopathology. Behavior Genetics of Psychopathology summarizes the state of the field, examiningthe role of genes and environment as they affect common neurodevelopmental and psychiatric conditions. Emphasizing key research areas (comorbidities, twin studies, the integration of methods), the book assesses the current literature, offers up-to-date findings, sorts through lingering controversies, and identifies a clear future agenda for the field. Expertly-written chapters focus on issues of both general salience that shape behavior genetics of psychopathology, to specific disorders of major clinical importance, among them: ADHD: the view from quantitative genetic research.Autism spectrum disorders and their complex heterogeneityGenetic influences on anxiety and depression in childhood and adolescence.Evidence for etiologically-defined subgroups within the construct of antisocial behavior.Sleep and psychopathology: the reasons for their co-occurrence. Behavioral genetic approaches to the etiology of comorbidity.Epigenetics of psychopathology. This combination of timeliness and depth of coverage make Behavior Genetics of Psychopathology a frontline resource for behavior geneticists, psychologists, psychiatrists, and neuroscientists, and is perfectly suited to graduate students looking to join these fields. | <p>Chapters review literature on genetics of specific disorders</p><p>Examines topics that cut across diagnostic boundaries, such as gene-environment interaction and comorbidity </p><p>Reviews the state of genome-wide association studies and the potential for new sequencing studies</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4939-0313-9 | Psychology | Weekes-Shackelford | [NAME], Oakland University, Rochester, MI, USA; [NAME], Oakland University, Rochester, MI, USA | Evolutionary Perspectives on Human Sexual Psychology and Behavior |  | Evolutionary Psychology |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 600 p. | 0 | approx. | 179 | Psychology | Sexual Behavior | SCY20080 | JMU | Gender Studies | SCY20090 | JMG | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | Planned | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Section 1: Introduction to Evolutionary Perspectives on Human Sexual Psychology and Behavior.- Evaluating Evidence of Mate Preference Adaptations: How Do We Really Know What Homo sapiens sapiens Really Want?.- Section 2: Sexual Adaptations in Men.- Adaptation and sexual offending.- Sexual selection on human voices.- Agreement and individual differences in men’s preferences for women’s facial characteristics.- Male adaptations to female ovulation.- (Mis)reading the signs: Men’s perception of women’s sexual interest.- Bodily Attractiveness as a Window to Women’s Fertility and Reproductive Value.- Social and environmental conditions intensifying male competition for resources, status, and mates lead to increased male mortality.- Male production of humor produced by sexually selected psychological adaptations.- Male adaptations to retain a mate.- Section 3: Sexual Adaptations in Women.- Evolutionary psychology and rape avoidance .- Female orgasm.- Female adaptations to ovulation.-Women’s preferences for male facial features.- Women’s disgust adaptations.- Female Perceptions of Male Body Movements.- Intrasexual Competition and other Theories of Eating Restriction.- Attractiveness and rivalry in women’s same-sex friendships.- Section 4: Conclusions and Future Directions for Evolutionary Perspectives on Human Sexual Psychology and Behavior.- Evolutionary perspectives on homosexual psychology and behavior.- Reflections on the Evolution of Human Sex Differences: Social Selection and the Evolution of Competition among Women. | This volume in the Springer Series in Evolutionary Psychology presents a state of the art view of the topic of sexuality and sexual behavior drawing on theoretical constructs and research of noted individuals in the field. Comprehensive and multi-disciplinary, this book seeks to provide a broad overview without sacrificing the complexity of a multi-faceted approach. The book is framed by introductory and closing sections that provide a context for the range of ideas contained within. Ample space is provided in designated sections that focus on key areas of sexuality from both male and female perspectives and that include information from primate studies. This volume can serve as a graduate text in sexual behavior in evolutionary terms and as a guide for further research. | Combines theoretical concepts with current empirical evidence<br>Balanced between male and female perspectives<br>Focus on human rather than primate evolution | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-3-319-03852-0 | Psychology | Stockwell | [NAME], Swinburne University, Hill End, Australia | Reframing the Transitional Justice Paradigm | Women's Affective Memories in Post-Dictatorial Argentina | Springer Series in Transitional Justice | 10 | 1 | 2014 | 209 | Hard cover | Book | I, 209 p. 1 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Psychology | Community and Environmental Psychology | SCY20070 | JMH | Political Science, general | SCX18000 | JPA | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1 ​Introduction.- Chapter 2 Historical Factors.- Chapter 3 Remembering the Military Dictatorship and Its Aftermath.- Chapter 4 Politics of Remembering Armed Guerrilla Violence Chapter.- 5 Deep Memory Chapter.- 6 Social Forces Shaping Memory Transmission Chapter.- 7 Haunting Chapter.- 8 Conclusion. | This volume explores the evolving and complex memorial consequences of state-sponsored violence in post-dictatorial Argentina. Specifically, it looks at the power and significance of personal emotions and affects in shaping memorial culture. This volume contends that we need to look beyond political and ideological contestations to a deeper level of how memorial cultures are formed and sustained. It argues that we cannot account for the politics of memory in modern-day Argentina without acknowledging and exploring the role played by individual emotions and affects in generating and shaping collective emotions and affects. Drawing from direct testimony from Argentinian women who have experienced political and physical violence, the research in this volume aims at understanding how their memories may be a different source of insight into the deep animosities within and between Argentine memorial cultures.In direct contrast to the nominally objective and universalist sensibility that traditionally has driven transitional justice endeavours, this volume examines how affective memories of trauma are a potentially disruptive power within the reconciliation paradigm—and thus affect should be taken into account when considering transitional justice. Accordingly, [NAME] of Remembrance for Women in Post-Dictatorial Argentina is an excellent resource for those interested in human rights, transitional justice, clinical psychology and social work, and Latin American conflicts. | <p>Examines the role of individual emotions in forming collective memories in Argentina</p><p>Draws upon first-hand oral testimonies from Argentinian women</p><p>Synthesizes the existing body of literature to trace the traumatic historical events in Argentina</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-5583-7 | Psychology | Teo | [NAME], York University Dept. Psychology, Toronto, ON, Canada | Encyclopedia of Critical Psychology |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 2400 |  | eReference work | 2400 p. eReference. | 1 | final | 1350 | Psychology | Cross Cultural Psychology | SCY20100 | JMH | History of Psychology | SCY28000 | PDX | Psychology | Encyclop(a)edia | Springer New York | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Definition.- History.- Traditional debates.- Critical debates.- International relevance.- Practice relevance.- Future directions.- Furhur readings.- Cross references.- Web-based information. | The International Encyclopedia of Psychology is a comprehensive reference work and is the first reference work in English that comprehensively looks at psychological topics from critical as well as international points of view. Thus, it will appeal to all committed to a critical approach across the IECP, for alternative analyses of psychological events, processes, and practices. The IECP provides commentary from expert critical psychologists from around the globe who will compose the entries. The IECP will feature approximately 1,000 invited entries, organized in an easy to use A-Z format. The encyclopedia will be compiled under the direction of the editor who has published widely in the field of critical psychology and due to his international involvements is knowledgeable about the status of critical psychology around the world. The expert contributors will summarize current critical-psychological knowledge and discuss significant topics from a global perspective. | <p>Entries from international experts</p><p>Includes consulations from critical, international, and indigenous perspectives</p><p>The only major refernce on this topic</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-5582-0 | Psychology | Teo | [NAME], York University Dept. Psychology, Toronto, ON, Canada | Encyclopedia of Critical Psychology |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 2400 | Hard cover | Book | 2400 p. In 4 volumes, not available separately. | 1 | final | 1350 | Psychology | Cross Cultural Psychology | SCY20100 | JMH | History of Psychology | SCY28000 | PDX | Psychology | Encyclop(a)edia | Springer New York | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Definition.- History.- Traditional debates.- Critical debates.- International relevance.- Practice relevance.- Future directions.- Furhur readings.- Cross references.- Web-based information. | The International Encyclopedia of Psychology is a comprehensive reference work and is the first reference work in English that comprehensively looks at psychological topics from critical as well as international points of view. Thus, it will appeal to all committed to a critical approach across the IECP, for alternative analyses of psychological events, processes, and practices. The IECP provides commentary from expert critical psychologists from around the globe who will compose the entries. The IECP will feature approximately 1,000 invited entries, organized in an easy to use A-Z format. The encyclopedia will be compiled under the direction of the editor who has published widely in the field of critical psychology and due to his international involvements is knowledgeable about the status of critical psychology around the world. The expert contributors will summarize current critical-psychological knowledge and discuss significant topics from a global perspective. | <p>Entries from international experts</p><p>Includes consulations from critical, international, and indigenous perspectives</p><p>The only major refernce on this topic</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-5584-4 | Psychology | Teo | [NAME], York University Dept. Psychology, Toronto, ON, Canada | Encyclopedia of Critical Psychology |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 2400 | Hard cover | Book + Online Access | 2400 p. Print + eReference. In 4 volumes, not available separately. | 1 | final | 1700 | Psychology | Cross Cultural Psychology | SCY20100 | JMH | History of Psychology | SCY28000 | PDX | Psychology | Encyclop(a)edia | Springer New York | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Definition.- History.- Traditional debates.- Critical debates.- International relevance.- Practice relevance.- Future directions.- Furhur readings.- Cross references.- Web-based information. | The International Encyclopedia of Psychology is a comprehensive reference work and is the first reference work in English that comprehensively looks at psychological topics from critical as well as international points of view. Thus, it will appeal to all committed to a critical approach across the IECP, for alternative analyses of psychological events, processes, and practices. The IECP provides commentary from expert critical psychologists from around the globe who will compose the entries. The IECP will feature approximately 1,000 invited entries, organized in an easy to use A-Z format. The encyclopedia will be compiled under the direction of the editor who has published widely in the field of critical psychology and due to his international involvements is knowledgeable about the status of critical psychology around the world. The expert contributors will summarize current critical-psychological knowledge and discuss significant topics from a global perspective. | <p>Entries from international experts</p><p>Includes consulations from critical, international, and indigenous perspectives</p><p>The only major refernce on this topic</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-9618-2 | Psychology | [NAME] | [NAME], SETI Institute, Center for SETI Research California Institute of Integral Studies, Mountain View, CA, USA; [NAME], California Institute of Integral Studies, San Francisco, CA, USA | Ecopsychology, Phenomenology, and the Environment | The Experience of Nature |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 199 | Hard cover | Book | I, 199 p. 10 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Psychology | Cognitive Psychology | SCY20060 | JMR | Community and Environmental Psychology | SCY20070 | JMH | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Intimacy, Otherness and Alienation: The Intertwining of Nature and Consciousness.- Mountain Reflections: Reverence for the Consciousness of Nature.- Diamond in the Rough: An Exploration of Aliveness and Transformation in Wilderness.- Intimate Responsivity As Our Shared Essence-Calling-Path-Fruition: Eco(psycho)logical Ethics Via Zen Buddhist Phenomenology.- The Naturalist’s Presence: Notes Toward a Relational Phenomenology of Attention and Meaning.- Nomadic Dimensions of Education with the Earth-in-Mind.- A Phenomenology of Intimate Relating and Identification with the Whole (And the Tale of the Woefully Misguided Aspirations of the Common Land Barnacle).- The Who of Environmental Ethics: Phenomenology and the Moral Self.- Elemental Imagination: Deconstructive Phenomenology and the Sense of Environmental Ethics.- [NAME]: An Ethic of Underworld Force.- Climate Chaos, Eco-Psychology and the Maturing Human Being.- Apocalyptic Imagination and the Silence of the Elements.- Eros of Erosion: The Shaping of an Archetypal Geology.- The Invisibility of Nature: Garbage, Play-Forts and the Deterritorialization of Urban Nature Spaces.- Lorecasting the Weather: Unhumanizing Phenomenology for Decoding the Language of Earth. | This book seeks to confront an apparent contradiction: that while we are constantly attending to environmental issues, we seem to be woefully out of touch with nature. The goal of Ecopsychology, Phenomenology and the Environment is to foster an enhanced awareness of nature that can lead us to new ways of relating to the environment, ultimately yielding more sustainable patterns of living. This volume is different from other books in the rapidly growing field of ecopsychology in its emphasis on phenomenological approaches, building on the work of phenomenological psychologists such as [NAME]. This focus on phenomenological methodologies for articulating our direct experience of nature serves as a critical complement to the usual methodologies of environmental and conservation psychologists, who have emphasized quantitative research. Moreover, Ecopsychology, Phenomenology and the Environment is distinctive insofar as chapters by phenomenologically-sophisticated ecopsychologists are complemented by chapters written by phenomenological researchers of environmental issues with backgrounds in philosophy and geology, providing a breadth and depth of perspective not found in other works written exclusively by psychologists. | <p>Explores environmental issues through wilderness retreats, naturalist‘s forest walks and organic gardening</p><p>Identifies new foundations for environmental ethics that promote sustainability</p><p>Finds commonalities between Eastern and Western psychological and contemplative traditions</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-94-017-8541-9 | Psychology | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Essex, Colchester, UK | Human Motivation and Interpersonal Relationships | Theory, Research, and Applications |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 13 | Hard cover | Book | CCCLXXX, 13 p. 21 illus., 3 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Psychology | Personality and Social Psychology | SCY20050 | JMS | Quality of Life Research | SCX23000 | JFF | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | PART I: INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF MOTIVTION IN RELATIONSHIPS.- Chapter 1: On the Mutuality of Human Motivation and Relationships; [NAME] and [NAME] DeHaan.- Chapter 2: The Universality of Psychological Autonomy across [NAME]: Arguments from Developmental and Social Psychology; [NAME] Chapter 3: Autonomy and Need Satisfaction in Close Relationships: Relationship Motivation Theory; Edward Deci and Richard Ryan.- PART II: MECHANISMS AND OUTCOMES OF MOTIVATION: THE ‘DARK SIDE’ AND ‘BRIGHT SIDE’ OF RELATIONSHIPS.- Chapter 4: Is Relatedness Enough? On the Importance of Need Support in Different Types of Social Experiences; [NAME], [NAME] and Bart Soenens.- Chapter 5: On the Flexibility of the Automatic Us-Them Divide; Jen-Ho Chang, [NAME], [NAME] and Chin-Lan Huang.- Chapter 6: The Self-Concept in Relationships; [NAME] 7: Self-Determination and the Regulation of Conflict in Romantic Relationships; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] 8: The Role of Autonomy in Intergroup Process: Toward an Integration of Self-Determination Theory and Intergroup Approaches; [NAME] and [NAME] Amiot.- Chapter 9: Autonomy Support as Acceptance for Disclosing and Developing a Health Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual or Transgendered Identity; [NAME] and [NAME] Ryan.- PART III: APPLICATIONS OF MOTIVATION RESEARCH.- Chapter 10: Parental Conditional Regard: Psychological Costs and Antecedents; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME]-Maymon.- Chapter 11: Relationships within Physical Activity Settings; [NAME] and [NAME] Emm.- Chapter 12: The Importance of Need-Supportive Relationships for Motivation and Psychological Health at Work; Véronique Dagenais-Desmarais, [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] 13: The Influence of the Social Environment on Health Behavior Change; [NAME] and Heather Patrick.- Chapter 14: Motivation in the Client-Counselor Relationship; Martin Lynch.- Chapter 15: Self-Determination and the Patient-Health Practitioner Relationship; [NAME]. | This volume summarizes and organizes a growing body of research supporting the role of motivation in adaptive and rewarding interpersonal interactions with others. The field of human motivation is rapidly growing but most studies have focused on the effects of motivation on individuals' personal happiness and task engagement. Only recently have theorists and empiricists begun to recognize that dispositional and state motivations impact the ways individuals approach interpersonal interactions. In addition, researchers are now recognizing that the quality of interpersonal interactions influences consequent happiness and task engagement, thus helping to explain previous findings to this end. Similarly social psychology and relationships researchers have focused on the impact of cognitions, emotions, and behaviors on people's relationships. In their work, relationships researchers demonstrate that both contextual characteristics and individual differences influence the quality of interactions. Many of these studies seek to understand which characteristics strengthen the bonds between people, encourage empathy and trust and create a sense of well-being after a close interaction. This work seeks to integrate the field of human motivation and interpersonal relationships. Both fields have seen extensive growth in the past decade and each can contribute to the other. However, no single compiled work is available that targets both fields. This is the case, in part because only now is there enough work to make a strong and compelling case for their integration. In the previous years, research has been conducted to show that motivation is relevant and important for interactions among strangers and in close relationships. In addition developmental mechanisms for these relations are identified and mechanisms by which motivation strengthens people's relationships. Finally recent work has demonstrated the many implications for interpersonal relationships, showing that motivation impacts a range of interpersonal processes from prejudice regulation and objectification of others to empathy and care. This book seeks to summarize and organize all these findings and present them in a way that is relevant to both motivation researchers and social and relationship researchers. | <p>The first book to integrate the field of human motivation and interpersonal relationships</p><p>Written by outstanding scholars in the domain of motivation</p><p>Systematical overview of theoretical foundations to psychological processes and empirical outcomes</p><p>Addresses to both the positive and negative outcomes of the core concepts</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4899-8022-9 | Psychology | Wiederhold | [NAME], Virtual Reality Medical Center Interactive Media Institute, San Diego, CA, USA; [NAME], Université du Québec en Outaouais Dept. Psychoéducation et de, Gatineau, QC, Canada | Virtual Reality Based Treatments for Anxiety Disorders |  | Series in Anxiety and Related Disorders |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book with CD-ROM | Approx. 200 p. With CD-ROM. | 0 | approx. | 69.95 | Psychology | Clinical Psychology | SCY12005 | MMJ |  |  |  | Psychology | Professional book | Springer US | Planned | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction and Virtual Reality Definitions – Brief History of Virtual Reality – Presence and Immersion – Virtual Reality Side Effects and Cybersickness – Setting up a Virtual Reality Clinic – Clinical Guidelines for Virtual Reality Therapy – Ethics of Virtual Reality Therapy – Future Trends and New Areas of Investigation – Overview of Anxiety Disorders and their Treatment – Aviophobia – Fear of Driving and Driving Skills Analysis – Panic Disorder and [NAME] – Social Phobia – Arachnophobia – Acrophobia – Posttraumatic Stress Disorder – [NAME] – Obsessive-Compulsive Disorder – Distraction Techniques for Anxiety during Medical Procedures – References – Internet-Based Information and Resource List – Appendices | Behavioral therapy has been a traditionally effective method of treating anxiety disorders. In this therapy, patients learn that the more that they expose themselves to a fearful situation, the better they will be able to cope with more anxiety-provoking situations in the future. Virtual reality treatment is structured in the same way as traditional behavioral therapy. The big difference is that patients are exposed to virtual environments and not real situations. VR treatment makes it possible to recreate the painful stimulus, enabling both the patient and clinician to have complete control over the situation. VR also allows patients to confront fears that are not easy to simulate because of geography or cost – fear of heights or flying for example. This book is a comprehensive review of the use of virtual reality to treat anxiety disorders, including specific phobias, panic disorder and agoraphobia, social phobia, obsessive compulsive disorder and post traumatic stress disorder (PTSD). The book includes a review of the results of past research and controlled studies on each disorder, descriptions of the symptomatology of each disorder, protocols for the treatment of each disorder and the ethical implications of virtual reality treatment. | Contains significant new information about VR and anxiety disorders, information that is available in no other single book<br>Includes both clinical protocols and practical analysis of research implications of VR therapy <br>Is a comprehensive review of the use of virtual reality to treat anxiety disorders | Professionals | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-3-319-04056-1 | Psychology | [NAME] | Dubravka Zarkov, International Institute of Social Studies/EUR, The Hague, The Netherlands; Marlies Glasius, University of Amsterdam, Amsterdam, The Netherlands | Narratives of Justice in and out of the Courtroom | Former Yugoslavia and Beyond | Springer Series in Transitional Justice | 8 | 1 | 2014 | 150 | Hard cover | Book | XXV, 150 p. 15 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Psychology | Community and Environmental Psychology | SCY20070 | JMH | International Criminal Law | SCR19040 | LBBZ | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-03-26 00:00:00 |  |  | ​ Introduction.- Part One. Narratives of Law and Justice in the International Courtrooms.- Chapter 1 ‘Locals’ and ‘Internationals’ in Discourses and Practices of International Justice.- Chapter 2 Expert Witnesses and the International War Crimes Trials. Making Sense of Large-Scale Violence in Rwanda.- Chapter 3 Terror, Terrorizing, Terrorism. Instilling Fear as a Crime in the Cases of Radovan Karadzic and Charles Taylor.- Chapter 4 The Shifting Status of Grand Narratives in War Crimes Trials and International Law. History and Politics in the Courtroom.- Part Two: Dealing with Justice after Yugoslav Wars.- Chapter 5  A Crack in the Wall of Denial. The Scorpions Video in and out of the Serbian Courtrooms.- Chapter 6 Tracing Dialogue on the Legacy of War Crimes in Serbia.- Chapter 7 ‘Forever Connected’. State Narratives and the Dutch Memory of Srebrenica.- Chapter 8   Resisting the Culture of Trauma in Bosnia and Herzegovina.  [NAME] for/in Cultural and Knowledge Production.- Chapter 9 War Reparations in Bosnia and Herzegovina. Individual Stories and [NAME]. | This volume considers the dynamic relations between the contemporary practices of international criminal tribunals and the ways in which competing histories, politics and discourses are re-imagined and re-constructed in the former Yugoslavia and beyond. There are two innovative aspects of the book - one is the focus on narratives of justice and their production, another is in its comparative perspective. While legal scholars have tended to analyze transitional justice and the international war tribunals in terms of their success or failure in establishing the facts of war crimes, this volume goes beyond mere facts and investigates how the courts create a symbolic space within which competing narratives of crimes, perpetrators and victims are produced, circulated and contested. It analyzes how international criminal law and the courts gather, and in turn produce, knowledge about societies in war, their histories and identities, and their relations to the wider world.Moreover, the volume situates narratives of transitional justice in former Yugoslavia both within specific national spaces - such as Serbia, and Bosnia - and beyond the Yugoslav. In this way it also considers experiences from other countries and other times (post-World War II) to offer a sounding board for re-thinking the meanings of transitional justice and institutions within former Yugoslavia. Included in the volume's coverage is a look at the Rwandan tribunals, the trials of [NAME], [NAME], the [NAME] genocide, and other war crimes and criminals in the Yugoslav. Finally, it frames all of those narratives and experiences within the global dynamics of legal, social and geo-political transformations, making it an excellent resource for social science researchers, human rights activists, those interested in the former Yugoslavia and international relations, and legal scholars. | <p>Focuses on international criminal tribunals and how narratives of justice are constructed</p><p>Provides insights into the activities within the actual courtrooms, including witness testimony, as well as the broader social and political debates</p><p>Offers perspectives on the Rwanda tribunal, [NAME] trial, the [NAME] trial, and how they relate to the experiences of the former [NAME] | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-9621-2 | Psychology | Zayas | [NAME], Cornell University, Ithaca, NY, USA; [NAME], Cornell University, Ithaca, NY, USA | Bases of Adult Attachment | Linking Brain, Mind and Behavior |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 250 p. | 0 | approx. | 129 | Psychology | Developmental Psychology | SCY20010 | JMC | Personality and Social Psychology | SCY20050 | JMS | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | Planned | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | ​​A Theoretical Model of Adult Attachment Formation.- Processes involved in initial attraction and formation of new relationships.- Roots of adult attachment: The role of working models on attraction and partner preference.- Attachment in the age of online dating and social networking.- Beckes, Simpson, and [NAME] delineate the cognitive and neural processes by which individuals may come to associate unknown others with feelings of security, a defining characteristic of attachment.- Affect regulation.- Separation distress.- Secure base/exploration.- Neural correlates of attachment in newlyweds and long-term married couples.- Coregulation synchrony.- Evolutionary perspective.- Physiological synchrony.- The role of regulatory function of attachment relationships in the development of anxiety disorders. | The book addresses the major theoretical question of how adult attachment develops. By facilitating the cross-fertilization of research findings from distinct perspectives on adult attachment. This work presents an innovative theoretical model of adult attachment that elucidates the varied processes underlying its formation and development. In so doing, it highlights the utility of applying a multilevel perspective analysis, and the implications and directions for present and future research in linking brain, mind, and behavior. This book brings together distinguished researchers and scholars investigating attachment bonds at various stages of development, such as initial attraction, emergence of secure base, safe haven, and separation distress behaviors, which are the hallmarks of attachment relationships, and functioning of the attachment bond in long-term mates. These scholars investigate attachment processes using varied research designs (experimental to longitudinal) and focusing on different levels of analyses (cognitive, affective, neural). The chapters address these questions, such as: What are the processes by which a person goes from a nonattachment figure to an attachment figure? What are the mechanisms by which members of a couple regulate each other’s physiological, affective, and behavioral responses? What are the consequences of such co-regulation and synchrony? And, what factors disrupt it? Are there normative phases of adult attachment formation and development? If so, does the process follow a sequential, stage-like series of development, or does it reflect, more or less, synchronous and overlapping processes? Are such attachment bonds in adulthood qualitatively different from other close relationships, or does it fall at the end of a continuum of affiliation? And, how do attachment bonds dissolve as a result of loss or breakup? | <p>Offers a new theoretical framework for the normative developmental processes</p><p>Links neuroscientific findings with psychological processes and behavior​</p><p>Focuses on the development of adult attachment​</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-3-319-03985-5 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], Usmanu Danfodiyo University, Sokoto, Nigeria; [NAME], University of Bielefeld, Bielefeld, Germany | Medical Sociology in Africa |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 260 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 260 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Social Sciences | Sociology, general | SCX22000 | JHB | Public Health | SCH27002 | MBN | Social Sciences / Sociology | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | 1: Sociology and Health: The Nexus.- 2: Health, Disease and Illness as Conceptual Tools.- 3; Health Behaviour (HB) and Illness Behaviour.- 4: Social Determinants/Context of Health.- 5: Functionalist Perspective on Health.- 6: Social Production of Health: Marxism and Feminism.- 7: Interpretive Perspective in Medical Sociology – Part I.- 8: Interpretive Perspective in Medical Sociology – Part II.- 9: Medicalisation and Client-Practitioner Relations.- 10: Medical Pluralism: Traditional and Modern Health Care.- 11: Towards a Sociology of Bioethics.- 12: Towards a Sociological study of Health Problems in Africa. ​ | This book presents a comprehensive discussion of classical ideas, core topics, currents, and detailed theoretical underpinnings in medical sociology. It is a globally renowned source and reference for those interested in social dimensions of health and illness. The presentation is enriched with explanatory and illustrative styles. The design and illustration of details will shift the minds of the readers from mere classroom discourse to societal context (the space of health issues), to consider the implications of those ideas in a way that could guide health interventions. The elemental strengths are the sociological illustrations from African context, rooted in deep cultural interpretations necessitated because Africa bears a greater brunt of health problems. More so, the classical and current epistemological and theoretical discourse presented in this book are indicative of core themes in medical sociology in particular, but cut across a multidisciplinary realm including health social sciences (e.g., medical anthropology, health psychology, medical demography, medical geography and health economics) and health studies (medicine, public health, epidemiology, bioethics, and medical humanities) in general. Therefore, apart from the book’s relevance as a teaching text of medical sociology for academics, it is also meant for students at various levels and all health professionals who require a deeper understanding of social dimensions of health and illness (with illustrations from the African context), and sociological contributions to health studies in general. | <p>Provides a global source and reference in social dimensions of health and illness</p><p>Global relevance coupled with illustration from African context</p><p>Presentation of current research directions in the field</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03028-9 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], Ben-Gurion University of the Negev, [NAME], Israel; [NAME], Austrian Academy of Sciences, Vienna, Austria | Mortality in an International Perspective |  | European Studies of Population | 18 | 1 | 2014 | 240 | Hard cover | Book | X, 240 p. 29 illus., 3 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | SCX25000 | JHBD | Public Health | SCH27002 | MBN | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction: Recent themes in mortality research: [NAME] and [NAME] in Small Areas, with an Application to Recent Changes in Life Expectancy in US Counties: [NAME] Congdon.- Socioeconomic determinants of mortality in Europe: Validation of recent models using the latest available data and short-term forecasts: Jeroen Spijker.- Social Disparities in the Evolution of an Epidemiological Profile: Transition Processes in Mortality between 1971 and 2008 in an Industrialized Middle Income Country – The Case of Hungary: Katalin Kovács.- Predicting Mortality from Profiles of Biological Risk and Performance Measures of Functioning: Sarinnapha Vasunilashorn, [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] to the assessment of alcohol-related losses in the Russian population: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], and [NAME] Infant mortality measurement and rate of progress on international commitments: a matter of methods or of guarantees of rights? Some evidence from Argentina: María Marta Santillán Pizarro, Eleonora [NAME] and [NAME] Celton.- Avoidable Factors Contributing to [NAME] in Turkey: İlknur Yüksel-Kaptanoğlu, Ahmet Sinan Türkyılmaz and İsmet Koç.- Changes in Mortality at Older Ages: The case of Spain (1975- 2006): [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] in Institutions: The Influence of Health and Disability Status: [NAME], [NAME] and Jon Anson.- Life expectancy differences in Cuba: Are females lessening their advantage over males?: [NAME] and [NAME] Variable scales of avoidable mortality within the Russian population: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Long-term mortality decline in East Asia, with particular reference to changes in age patterns of mortality and major causes of death: [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME]. ​ | This volume presents a state of the art coverage of the measurement and evolution of mortality over time.  It describes in great detail the changes in the cause patterns of mortality, the changes in mortality patterns at different ages, and specific analyses of mortality in particular countries. Derived from a meeting of the European Working Group on Health, Morbidity and Mortality held at the Vienna Institute of Demography, September 2011, it presents a cross-section of the work and concerns of mortality  researchers across Europe, ranging from London and Madrid in the west to Moscow in the east, with a few additions from further afield. Although most of the papers focus on a particular population, the range of the papers is broad; taken together they present an inter-disciplinary cross-section of this multi-faceted field. Coverage includes estimating life expectancy in small areas, with an application to recent changes in US counties; socioeconomic determinants of mortality in Europe using the latest available data and short-term forecasts; predicting mortality from profiles of biological risk and performance measures of functioning; infant mortality measurement and rate of progress on international commitment using evidence from Argentina; avoidable factors contributing to maternal deaths in Turkey; changes in mortality at older ages: the case of Spain (1975- 2006); variable scales of avoidable mortality within the Russian population;  long-term mortality decline in East Asia, and much more. Perspectives in Mortality Research will serve as a valuable resource for professionals and students in sociology, demography, public health and personal finance. | <p>Presents a state of the art coverage of the measurement and evolution of mortality</p><p>Features papers from a meeting of the European Working Group on Health, Morbidity and Mortality held at the Vienna Institute of Demography, September 2011</p><p>Includes specific analyses of mortality in a wide range of countries and regions, including the US, Argentina, Belgium, Cuba, Hungary, Russia, Turkey, and East Asia</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03265-8 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], EPFL Ecole Polytechnique Fédérale de L, Lausanne, Switzerland | Late Modernity | Trajectories towards Morphogenic Society | Social Morphogenesis |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 200 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Social Sciences | Sociology, general | SCX22000 | JHB | International Relations | SCX18040 | JPS | Social Sciences / Sociology | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- Chapter 1. Introduction: 'Stability' or Stabilization' - on which would Morphogenic Society Depend?; [NAME] 2. A Speeding up of the Rate of Social Change? Power, Technology, Resistance, Globalization and the Good Society; [NAME] Lawson.- Chapter 3. The Emergent Social Qualities of a 'Morphogenetic' Society: Cultures, Structures, and Forms of Reflexivity; [NAME]. Contemporary Mechanisms of Social Change; [NAME] Chapter 5. The Generative Mechanisms Re-Configuring Late Modernity; [NAME] 6. On the Validity of Describing 'Morphogenic Society' as a System and Justifiability of Thinking about it as a Social Formation; [NAME] Hofkirchner.- Chapter 7. Morphogenic Society and the Structure of Social Relations; Pierpaolo Donati.- Chapter 8. Morphogenesis Unbound from the Dynamics of Multilevel Networks: A Neo-Structural Perspective; [NAME] 9. Morphogenesis and Normativity: Problems the Former Creates for the Latter; [NAME] Chapter 10. Morphogenesis and Cooperation in the International Political System; [NAME]. | This volume examines the reasons for intensified social change after 1980; a peaceful process of a magnitude that is historically unprecedented. It examines the kinds of novelty that have come about through morphogenesis and the elements of stability that remain because of morphostasis. It is argued that this pattern cannot be explained simply by ‘acceleration’. Instead, we must specify the generative mechanism(s) involved that underlie and unify ordinary people’s experiences of different disjunctions in their lives. The book discusses the umbrella concept of ‘social morphogenesis’ and the possibility of transition to a ‘Morphogenic Society’. It examines possible ‘generative mechanisms’ accounting for the effects of ‘social morphogenesis’ in transforming previous and much more stable practices. Finally, it seeks to answer the question of what is required in order to justify the claim that Morphogenic society can supersede modernity. | <p>Advances generative mechanisms that produce social change rapidly in late modernity</p><p>Discusses the possibility of transition to Morphogenic Society</p><p>Investigates of what is requires in order to justify the claim that morphogenic society can supersede [NAME]> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03520-8 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Heidelberg, Heidelberg, Germany; [NAME], University of Heidelberg, Heidelberg, Germany; Darja Miyajima, University of Heidelberg, Heidelberg, Germany | [NAME]? | Diglossia, Translation and the Rise of Modernity in Japan, China, and the Slavic World | Transcultural Research – Heidelberg Studies on Asia and Europe in a Global Context |  | 1 | 2014 | 277 | Soft cover | Book | X, 277 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Social Sciences | Cultural Studies | SCX22040 | JFC | Translation | SCN47000 | CFP | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I: [NAME] and Functional Variation.- Understanding the Essence of Diglossia.- Czech Diglossia: Dismantling or Dissolution?.- [NAME] and its Discontent: The Linguistics of National Crisis in Early Twentieth-Century China.- Chinese Diglossia: Past and Present.- Shifting Patterns of Chinese Diglossia: Why the Dialects May Be Headed for Extinction.- Part II: Linguistic Awareness and Changing Perceptions of Varieties.- Discourse on Poetic Language in Early Modern Japan and the Awareness of Linguistic Change.- Genbun itchi and Questione della lingua: Theoretical Intersections in the Creation of a New Written Language in Meiji Japan and Renaissance Italy.- Linguistic Awareness and Language Use: The Chinese Literati at the Beginning of the Twentieth Century.- Homogenization or Hierarchization?––A Problem of Written Language in the Public Sphere of Modern Japan.- Part III: [NAME] and Translation.- Modeling the Shifting Face of the Discourse Mediator.- Translation within the Polyglossic Linguistic System of Early Meiji-Period Japan.- Genbun itchi and Literary Translations in Later Nineteenth-Century Japan: The Role of Literary Translations in Forming the “De-aru” Style.- The Role of Russian in the Dissolution of Diglossia in Japan: Translations by [NAME]. | The present volume is a collection of papers presented at the international conference “Linguistic Awareness and Dissolution of Diglossia” held in July 2011 at Heidelberg University. The aim is to reevaluate and compare the processes of dissolution of diglossia in East Asian and in European languages, especially in Japanese, Chinese and in Slavic languages in the framework of the asymmetries in the emergence of modern written languages. Specialists from China, Japan, Great Britain, Germany and the U.S. contributed to the volume by introducing their research focusing on aspects of the dissolution of diglossic situations and the role of translation in the process. The first group of texts focuses on the linguistic concept of diglossia and the different processes of its dissolution, while the second investigates the perception of linguistic varieties in historical and transcultural perspectives. The third and final group analyses the changing cultural role and function of translations and their effect on newly developing literary languages. | <p>Interdisciplinary: combines linguistics, translation studies and literary studies</p><p>Adopts a transcultural perspective</p><p>Its broad scope ranges from Slavic languages to Chinese and Japanese</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8603-4 | Social Sciences | Baglay | [NAME], University of Ontario, Oshawa, ON, Canada; [NAME], University of Ottawa, Ottawa, ON, Canada | Immigration Regulation in Federal States | Challenges and Responses in Comparative Perspective | International Perspectives on Migration | 9 | 1 | 2014 | 195 | Hard cover | Book | X, 195 p. 5 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Social Sciences | Migration | [NAME] | [NAME] | Social Policy | SCW12197 | KCP | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction: Part I. Nature of Immigration Regulation: Theoretical Perspectives: Chapter 1. [NAME] and Federalism: Responsibility for immigration in the light of the literature on federalism.- Chapter 2. [NAME]: On governance of migration management at the world level, lessons and challenges.- Chapter 3. [NAME]: Immigration Federalism and Rights.- Part II. Comparative Perspectives: Chapter 4. [NAME] and [NAME]: Immigration Federalism in Canada: Provincial and Territorial Nominee Programs (PTNPs).- Chapter 5. France Houle: Implementing Quebec Intercultural Policy through the Selection of Immigrants.- Chapter 6. [NAME]: Migration: the Australian Experience.- Chapter 7. [NAME]: Germany and the Janus Face of Immigration Federalism: Devolution vs. Centralization.- Chapter 8. [NAME] Federalism.- Chapter 9. [NAME]: The Transformation of U.S. Immigration Federalism: A Critical Reading of Arizona v. United States.- Chapter 10. [NAME]: Immigration Regulation as a Battleground: The European Union's Anxiety over Federalism. | The book examines the phenomenon of immigration federalism: its main characteristics, why and how it has developed, its implications for immigration systems (in general) and non-citizens’ rights (in particular). The book introduces the reader to theoretical perspectives on immigration federalism through three sets of literature – federalism, governance and non-citizens’ rights – that provide a necessary framework for understanding immigration federalism’s multiple facets and impacts. It also offers an analysis of immigration federalism through case studies of six jurisdictions: Australia, Canada, Germany, Switzerland, the EU and the US.Despite increased sub-national activity in immigration regulation in several federal states, very little research has been dedicated so far to comparing how federal states deal with immigration federalism. Comparative studies on the human rights implications of immigration federalism have received even less attention. This book seeks to fill the gap in this area and is an important contribution to the field, providing the reader with a better understanding of the complex issues surrounding immigration federalism and its impact on non-citizens. | <p><p><p><p>Fills a gap in the literature relating to federal states by focusing on the interplay between sub-national jurisdictions and national policy</p><p><p>Includes analysis and case studies from around the world</p><p><p>Discusses the impact of supranational EU regulation on immigration regulation in federalist member states</p><p><p>Fills a gap in the literature relating to federal states by focusing on the interplay between sub-national jurisdictions and national policy</p><p><p>Includes analysis and case studies from around the world</p><p><p>Discusses the impact of supranational EU regulation on immigration regulation in federalist member states</p><p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4939-0350-4 | Social Sciences | Barth | [NAME], New York, NY, USA | Integrative Social Work Practice | A Contemporary Perspective | Essential Clinical Social Work Series |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 320 p. | 0 | approx. | 129 | Social Sciences | Social Work | SCX21000 | JKSN | Psychotherapy and Counseling | [NAME] | MMJT | Social Sciences / Social Work | Monograph | Springer New York | Planned | 2014-03-01 00:00:00 |  |  | .- ​Preface.- Integration or Eclecticism: Rationale for an Integrative Theory.- Contemporary Psychodynamic Models.- Developmental Models.- Cognitive and Behavioral Models.- The Body-Mind Connection.- Making Assessments and Choosing Interventions.- An Integrative Approach to Therapeutic Relationships.- Small Steps and Manageable Goals.- Building and Working with an Integrative Team.- Working on and Working through. | In recent history the practice of medicine and mental health  has been increasingly eclectic as more and more practitioners harness seemingly disparate therapies and techniques to arrive at clinical breakthroughs. But while social work professionals have been involved in integrative practice informally and intuitively for years, resources to bring structure to this therapeutic concept have been few and far between.In response, Integrative Social Work Practice offers innovative ways of conceptualizing cases, communicating with clients and making better therapeutic use of client individuality. Rich in research, evidence-based and clinical material from a variety of settings, the book begins with the basic organizing principles behind effective integrative practice. Real-world examples flesh out the theoretical rationales and psychodynamic, cognitive, behavioral and developmental methods are shown in practical context. The author also demonstrates how to balance flexibility and boundaries and manage diverse and even conflicting theories, while providing clear guidelines on:Integrating key psychotherapeutic approaches into social work.Using somatic knowledge to enhance therapy.Making assessments and choosing interventions.Applying an integrative approach to therapeutic relationships.Creating manageable goals based on small steps.Building and working with an integrative team.An important step forward in both professional development and the larger therapeutic picture, Integrative Social Work Practice benefits researchers and practitioners as well as supervisors and students in social work and counseling. | <p>Provides a unifying theory of social work practice</p><p>Reviews existing clinical and research literature on integrated approaches</p><p>Offers practical guidelines to inform treatment, supervision and training of clinicians</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03406-5 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], St. Catharine's College, Cambridge, UK | Legacies of Occupation | Heritage, Memory and Archaeology in the Channel Islands | Contributions To Global Historical Archaeology | 40 | 1 | 2014 | 301 | Hard cover | Book | XVII, 301 p. 59 illus., 42 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Social Sciences | Archaeology | SCX13000 | HD | Cultural Management | SCX22050 | JFC | Social Sciences / Archaeology | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | ​Chapter 1: Introduction: Legacies of OccupationChapter 2: Collecting the debris of war in the Channel IslandsChapter 3: German bunkers: Edifices of abomination or historic monuments?Chapter 4: Labour camps: sites of oblivionChapter 5: The politics of memory on Liberation DayChapter 6: Interpreting memorial landscapes of occupation and liberationChapter 7: Conclusion: Heritage, identity and generations​ | This book explores the way in which the legacy of the German occupation of the Islands has been turned into heritage (or, conversely, neglected) over the last 70 years. Once seen as the ‘taint of the mark of the beast’, the perception of much of what the Germans left behind has slowly changed from being despised and reviled, buried underground or dumped at sea, to being reclaimed, restored, highly valued and treated as ‘heritage’. This book examines the journey of various aspects of this heritage, exploring the role of each post-war generation in picking at the scar of occupation, refusing to let it heal or fade. By discovering and interpreting anew their once-hated legacy, each generation of Islanders have changed the resulting collective memory of a period which is rapidly moving to the edge of living memory. It will include the first in-depth investigation into the heritage of occupation and will offer comparative material for other heritage professionals who work with similar material throughout Europe and in other post-occupation areas. It will explore the complex ethical issues faced by anyone who works with the legacy or heritage of Nazism, seeking to understand how and why the Channel Islands have responded in the way that they have and asking how unique – or typical for formerly-occupied Europe - their response has been. | <p>Provides a detailed view into the impact of the German occupation on the British Channel islands</p><p>Explores wartime narrative through heritage and site of memory</p><p>The only book to take a wide ranging approach to the analysis of German occupation  on other European countries</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7524-4 | Social Sciences | Contini | [NAME], Research Institute on Judicial Systems, Bologna, Italy; [NAME], University of Bologna, Bologna, Italy | The Circulation of Agency in E-Justice | Interoperability and Infrastructures for European Transborder Judicial Proceedings | Law, Governance and Technology Series | 13 | 1 | 2014 | 365 | Hard cover | Book | XXI, 365 p. 35 illus., 30 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 179 | Social Sciences | Political Science, general | SCX18000 | JPA | [NAME] | SCR20000 | LB | Social Sciences / Political Science | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | Available | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 | 2013-11-15 00:00:00 |  | Contents.- List of Abbreviations.- Introduction: The Challenge of Interoperability and Complexity in European Civil Proceedings Online;  [NAME] and [NAME] Lanzara.- Part I Beyond Interoperability.- Chapter 1 The Circulation of Agency in Judicial Proceedings: Designing for Interoperability and Complexity; [NAME] Lanzara.- Chapter 2 Developing Pan-European e-Government Solutions. From Interoperability to Installed Base Cultivation; Ole Hanseth.- Chapter 3 How the Law can make it Simple: Easing the Circulation of Agency in e-Justice; [NAME] and [NAME] Mohr.- Part II Building e-justice: National and European Experiences.- Chapter 4 Law, Technology and System Architectures:  Critical Design Factors for Money Claim and Possession Claim OnLine in England and Wales; Giampiero Lupo.- Chapter 5 Functional Simplification through Holistic Design: The COVL Case in Slovenia; Gregor Strojin.- Chapter 6 The Piecemeal Development of an e-Justice Platform: The CITIUS Case in Portugal; [NAME], [NAME] and Diana Fernandes.- Chapter 7 Pushing at the Edge of Maximum Manageable Complexity: The case of ‘Trial OnLine’ in Italy; Davide Carnevali e [NAME] The Making of Pan-European Infrastructure: From the Schengen Information System to the European Arrest Warrant; [NAME] Velicogna.- Chapter 9 Searching for Maximum Feasible Simplicity: the Case of e-Curia at the Court of Justice of the European Union; Francesco Contini.- Part III Complexity and the Circulation of Agency in Transborder Civil Proceedings.- Chapter 10 Legal Interoperability in Europe: An Assessment of the European Payment Order and the European Small Claims Procedure; [NAME] Mellone.- Chapter 11 Testing Transborder Civil Procedures in Practice: Findings from Simulation Experiments with the European Payment Order and the European Small Claims Procedure; [NAME] Ng.- Chapter 12 Building Semantic Interoperability for European Civil Proceedings Online; Marta Poblet, [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Chapter 13 Coming to Terms with Complexity Overload in Transborder e-Justice: The e-CODEX Platform; [NAME] Velicogna.- Chapter 14 Let Agency Circulate: Architectures and Strategies for Pan-European e-Justice; [NAME] Contini.- About the Authors.- Index. | This book contributes to an understanding of the dynamic complexities involved in the design of e-justice applications that enable online trans-border judicial proceedings in Europe. It provides answers to critical questions with practical relevance: How should online trans-border judicial proceedings be designed in order to deliver effective and timely justice to European citizens, businesses and public agencies? How can the circulation of judicial agency across Europe be facilitated? Based on extensive research, the book explores and assesses the complex entanglements between law and technology, and between national and European jurisdictions that emerge when developing even relatively simple e-services such as those supporting the European small claims procedure and European payment orders. In addition to providing a strong theoretical framework and an innovative approach to e-justice design, this book includes case studies that are based on a common methodology and theoretical framework. It presents original empirical material on the development of e-government systems in the area of European justice. Finally, it introduces the design strategies of Maximum Feasible Simplicity and Maximum Manageable Complexity and, based on them, it proposes architectural and procedural solutions to enhance the circulation of judicial agency.​ | <p>The only book on e-justice designed focussed on European trans-border judicial proceedings </p><p>Well timed to take advantage of the growing relevance of European Union integration </p><p>Presents a fresh perspective to map out the key issues affecting the development of e-justice </p><p>The first multidisciplinary to analyse the issues of trans-border civil proceeding in Europe</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03127-9 | Social Sciences | Dillehay | [NAME], Vanderbilt University, Nashville, TN, USA | The Teleoscopic Polity | Andean Patriarchy and Materiality | Contributions To Global Historical Archaeology | 38 | 1 | 2014 | 317 | Hard cover | Book | I, 317 p. 102 illus., 60 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Social Sciences | Archaeology | SCX13000 | HD | Anthropology | SCX12000 | JHM | Social Sciences / Archaeology | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  |  | This volume provides an up-to-date and in-depth summary and analysis of the political practices of pre-Columbian communities of the Araucanians or Mapuche of south-central Chile and adjacent regions. This synthesis draws upon the empirical record documented in original research, as well as a critical examination of previous studies. By applying both archaeological and ethnohistorical approaches, the latter including ethnography, this volume distinguishes itself from many other studies that explore South American archaeology. Archaeological and traditional-historical narratives of the pre-European past are considered in their own terms and for the extent to which they can be integrated in order to provide a more rounded and realistic understanding than otherwise of the origins and courses of ecological, economic, social and political changes in south-central Chile from late pre-Hispanic times, through the contact period and up to Chile’s independence from Spain (ca. AD 1450-1810). Both the approach and the results are discussed in the light of similar situations elsewhere.Throughout its treatment, the volume continually comes back to two central questions: (1) how did the varied practices, institutions, and worldviews of the Mapuche’s ancient communities emerge as a historical process that resisted the Spanish empire for more than 250 years? and (2) how were these communities reproduced and transformed in the face of ongoing culture contact and landscape change during the early Colonial period? These questions are considered in light of contemporary theoretical concepts regarding practice, landscape, environment, social organization, materiality and community that will make the book relevant for students and scholars interested in similar processes elsewhere. | <p>Breaks new ground as one of the first treatments of the south-central Andes and colonization</p><p>Uses both archaeological and ethnohistorical approaches for its analysis</p><p>Contains three appendices covering paleoecology, subsistence remains, and ethnohistorical documents</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7828-3 | Social Sciences | Eckermann | [NAME], Deakin University, Geelong, VIC, Australia | Gender, Lifespan and Quality of Life | An International Perspective | Social Indicators Research Series | 53 | 1 | 2014 | 399 | Hard cover | Book | I, 399 p. 60 illus. | 0 | final | 179 | Social Sciences | Quality of Life Research | SCX23000 | JFF | Quality of Life Research | SCH65000 | MBNH | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1: Introduction: Why Is It Important to Sex Disaggregate and Gender Analyse Quality of Life Data? [NAME] Eckermann.- Chapter 2: Well-Being and Communication of 12 to 16 Year-Old Girls and Their Mothers: [NAME] and Intergenerational Issues in Spain; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and Ferran Casas.- Chapter 3: Gender Dimensions of Quality of Life for Adults in Australia; [NAME], [NAME] and Mark Stokes.- Chapter 4: Chasing the Good Life: Gender Differences in Work Aspirations of American Men and Women; [NAME] 5: Gender Dimensions of Quality of Life in Algeria; [NAME] 6: Mothers and Quality of Life in 26 EU Countries; Piotr Michoń.- Chapter 7: Gender Dimensions of Quality of Life in Romania; [NAME] 8: Quality of Life for Pregnant and Recent Parity Women in Laos; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Clarke.- Chapter 9: Gender Dimensions of Quality of Life in Russia; [NAME] 10: Re-marry Fast, Die Young: The Gender Related Happiness Inequalities Among Polish Adults; Piotr Michoń.- Chapter 11: Gender Considerations on Income and Health in Latin America; [NAME] Fassler.- Chapter 12: Subjective Well-Being Across Gender and Age in Japan: An Econometric Analysis; [NAME] and Florian Kohlbacher.- Chapter 13: [NAME], Family Formation and Well-Being in Ireland; [NAME] Chapter 14: Gender and Quality of Life in Singapore; [NAME] and [NAME] Tan.- Chapter 15: Age and Gender Differences in Well-Being in Croatia; [NAME] and Josip Burusic.- Chapter 16: Conclusion and Policy Implications; [NAME]. | This publication addresses the gender dimensions of people’s lived experience and emphasizes how gender relationships differentially impact on women’s and girls’ as well as men’s and boys’ subjective well-being across the lifespan. It therefore fills a significant gap in the literature on quality of life and subjective well-being. The book brings together research which compares female’s and male’s subjective experiences of well-being at various life stages from a variety of countries and regions, particularly focusing on women’s subjective well-being. Sex-disaggregation of data on objective conditions of quality of life is now routinely undertaken in many countries of the world. However, despite the burgeoning of objective data on sex differences in life conditions across the world, very little gender analysis is carried out to explain fully such difference and there is still a serious dearth of data on gender differences in subjective experiences of quality of life and well-being. This publication will assist researchers, teachers, service providers and policy makers in filling some of the gaps in currently available literature on the nexus between age and gender in producing differential experiences of subjective wellbeing. | <p>Represents the first attempt at significant gender and generational analyses to understand sex and age differences in well-being experiences and outcomes across the lifespan</p><p><p>Addresses how gender relationships differentially impact people’s lived experience on subjective well-being across the lifespan</p><p><p>Provides information on the dimensions of quality of life and happiness across countries and regions which can guide policy and services to improve wellbeing at all levels from the individual to the global population</p><p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-9634-2 | Social Sciences | Evans | Amanda Evans, Tesla Offshore, Inc, Prairieville, LA, USA; [NAME], University College London Fac. Arts, London, UK; Nic Flemming, University of Southampton, Southampton, UK | Prehistoric Archaeology on the Continental Shelf | A Global Review |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 386 | Hard cover | Book | I, 386 p. 90 illus., 30 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 179 | Social Sciences | Archaeology | SCX13000 | HD |  |  |  | Social Sciences / Archaeology | Monograph | Springer New York | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  |  | The chapters in this edited volume present multi-disciplinary case studies of prehistoric archaeological sites located on now-submerged portions of the continental shelf. Each chapter represents an extension of the known prehistoric record beyond the modern shoreline. Case studies represent central themes of landscape change, climate change and societal development, using new technologies for mapping, monitoring and managing these sites. | <p>Applies new archaeological techniques to study climate change during the last Ice Age and previous Ice Ages </p><p>Presents theoretical framework for understanding climate change </p><p>Discusses climate change effect on societies</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-6638-3 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Delaware, Newark, DE, USA | Hybrid Tribunals | A Comparative Examination of their Origins, Structure, Legitimacy and Effectiveness | Springer Series on International Justice and Human Rights |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 250 p. 20 illus. | 0 | approx. | 129 | Social Sciences | Criminology & Criminal Justice | SCX15000 | [NAME] | International Criminal Law | SCR19040 | LBBZ | Social Sciences / Criminology | Monograph | Springer New York | Planned | 2014-02-14 00:00:00 |  |  | ​​Introduction: Hybrid Tribunals in International Justice.-I: Forming the Hybrid Tribunals.- Sierra Leone: Civil War and Justice.- Kosovo: International and Hybrid Justice.- Cambodia: Justice (long) After the Fact.- East Timor: Genocide and Colonialism.- Lebanon: Assassination of Rafic Hariri and Global Justice.- II: Structuring the Tribunals.- Sierra Leone.- Kosovo.- Cambodia.- East Timor.- Lebanon.- III: The Tribunals in Action.- Sierra Leone: [NAME] and “The Other”.- Cambodia and Lebanon: Fighting for Independence.- Kosovo and East Timor: Working in the UN System.- IV: Conclusions: Evaluating the Tribunals.- Hybrid Tribunals and Local Justice.- Hybrid Tribunals and International Justice Revisited.- Guidelines for Future Tribunals.​ | ​​​Hybrid tribunals are a form of the international justice where the judicial responsibility is shared between the United Nations and the local state where they function.   These tribunals represent an important bridge between courts like the International Criminal Court (ICC), the International Criminal Tribunal for the Former Yugoslavia (ICTY), the International Criminal Tribunal for Rwanda (ICTR) and various local legal justice systems.  Because hybrid tribunals are developed in response to large-scale atrocities (or in the case of Lebanon a single murder), these courts are properly considered part of the international criminal justice system.  This feature gives hybrid tribunals the accountability and legitimacy often lost in local justice systems; however, by including regional courtroom procedures and personnel, they are integrated into the local justice system in a way that allows (in appearance, at least) a society to deal with its criminals on its own terms.  This book will examine hybrid tribunals in Sierra Leone, Kosovo, Cambodia, East Timor, and Lebanon in their entirety, in terms of their origins (the political and social forces that led to their creation), the legal regimes that they used, their various institutional structures, and the challenges that they faced.  Through this examination, the author will examine both their successes and their shortcomings, and present recommendations for the formation of future hybrid tribunals.  This unique volume combines historical and legal analyses of these hybrid tribunals, placing them within a larger context and providing recommendations for the formation of future hybrid tribunals. | ​​​Examines and compares 5 cases of international hybrid tribunals in Sierra Leone, Kosovo, Cambodia, East Timor, and Lebanon Provides a framework for studying these tribunals and the forces that created them Provides recommendations for evaluating them and recommendations for their future | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02581-0 | Social Sciences | Haberfeld | M.R. Haberfeld, City University of New York [NAME] of Criminal Justice, New York, NY, USA; [NAME], Interpol Secretariat General, [NAME], France | Match-Fixing in International Sports | Existing Processes, Law Enforcement, and Prevention Strategies |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 369 | Hard cover | Book | XVIII, 369 p. 17 illus., 14 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Social Sciences | Criminology & Criminal Justice | SCX15000 | [NAME] | International Sports Law | [NAME] | LNJS | Social Sciences / Criminology | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | Available | 2013-12-31 00:00:00 | 2013-11-23 00:00:00 |  | ​​   ​I. Corruption in Sport: Match Fixing Definitional and Operational Issues.- Introduction.- Match Fixing in Western Europe.- Match Fixing in Eastern Europe.- Corruption in Sports: An Argument for the Nodal Approach.- Regional Reflections: A Study of East Africa.- II. Preventing Match Fixing.- Facilitators and Responses to Match-Fixing: A Comparative Approach.- Which Factors Favor Betting Related Cheating in Sports?- Theoretical Model: A Case of Supply and Demand.- Compliance Mechanism as a Tool of Prevention?- III. Future: Where Do We Go From Here? - INTERPOL's Response.- Way Forward: [NAME] An [NAME]. | Match –fixing has become a widespread international problem in recent years. It includes everything from bribery of players, to putting undue influences on the owners of the soccer clubs, managers, coaches and others who have the ability to affect the final scores. In addition, match-fixing spills over into the arena of illegal betting (in person and online), which creates a host of additional organized crime opportunities, including human trafficking, prostitution, drugs, extortion and even terrorism. This timely volume brings together international contributions with an aim is to increase awareness of the problems associated with match-fixing and the degree to which key agents in sport, particularly young people, are vulnerable. The contributions are based on INTERPOL’s Global Experts Meeting in Singapore, in November 2012, which brought together key speakers to discuss issues surrounding match-fixing and how to combat corruption in football through channels of education. The purpose of this meeting was to identify ways that academia can play a role in developing and implementing training modules and academic courses, including certification procedures, to prevent match-fixing and develop lines of study at all educational levels. This unique work reflects the gravity of the situation around the world together with possible solutions. | Explores match-fixing in sports as an international criminological issue<br>Presents comparative research from a variety of countries and levels of competition<br>Provides possible solutions, recommendations for future research and policy changes to prevent match-fixing | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-45440-0 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], Xiamen University, Xiamen, People's Republic of China | Social Media Generation in Urban China | A Study of Social Media Use and Addiction among adolescents | Understanding China |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 300 p. 5 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Social Sciences | Communication Studies | SCX28000 | GTC | Personality and Social Psychology | SCY20050 | JMS | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Literature Review.- Research Methods.- Uses, Gratifications, and Addiction of Social Media.- Social Media Addiction and Sociopsychological Traits.- Social Media Addiction, [NAME], and Social Capital.- Beyond the Survey: What Parents and Teachers Said.- Discussion and Conclusions.- References. | Social media such as instant messaging (IM), social networking sites (SNS), blogs and microblogs are an integral part of adolescents’ lives in China. Anecdotal evidence reported in the news has suggested that the increasing popularity of social media could make adolescents more vulnerable to being addicted. This exploratory study proposes the concept of “social media addiction” and examines (a) whether social media addiction exists among adolescents in urban China and, if so, who the addicts are, what their symptoms are and to what extent they are addicted; (b) whether sociopsychological traits (e.g., need for affiliation, impression management, narcissism and leisure boredom) can predict social media addiction among adolescents; (c) what gratifications are obtained by adolescents from their use of social media and whether these gratifications can predict social media addiction and (d) to what degree social media addiction influences adolescents’ academic performance and social capital.This study employed quantitative questionnaire surveys among adolescents as the main research method, supplemented by qualitative pre-survey focus groups among adolescents and post-survey in-depth interviews among parents and teachers. Questionnaire surveys were conducted based on a multi-stage cluster sampling of seven middle schools in five urban Chinese cities: Beijing, Shanghai, Guangzhou, Shenzhen and Xiamen. The final sample consisted of 1,549 adolescents, of whom 90% had used social media. Using Young’s classic definition of Internet addiction, 15.6% of participants were classified as social media addicts. The addicted adolescents were often self-absorbed, bored with their leisure time, and good at using manipulation through social media for impression management. Addicts experienced four major social media addiction symptoms: preoccupation, adverse consequences, alleviation of negative emotions and loss of interest in social activities.The seven social media gratifications identified in this study can be categorized into social, information and entertainment gratifications. Among these, entertainment gratifications had the most power to predict social media addiction, while information gratifications were the least likely to lead to addiction. Furthermore, these gratifications were found to be powerful mediators between the adolescents’ sociopsychological traits and social media addiction. Finally, the results also indicated that social media addiction and its symptoms had a significant negative impact on adolescents’ academic performance and social capital. | <p>First book analyzing social media addiction among adolescents in China</p><p>Valuable first-hand empirical data from adolescents in five major cities in China</p><p>Analyzes in detail the social media addiction symptoms of adolescents</p><p>Provides effective guidelines for parents and educators to detect at an early stage and possibly prevent social media addiction in adolescents</p><p>Sets up a comprehensive model of social media addiction among adolescents from the causes to the consequences</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-0753-5 | Social Sciences | Michalos | [NAME], University of Northern British Columbia, Prince George, BC, Canada | Encyclopedia of Quality of Life and Well-Being Research |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 9116 |  | eReference work | 9116 p. eReference. | 1 | final | 4750 | Social Sciences | Quality of Life Research | SCX23000 | JFF | Positive Psychology | SCY44000 | [NAME] | Social Sciences | Encyclop(a)edia | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-01-02 00:00:00 |  |  | [NAME]/religious views of the good life.- Social indicators/social reporting in the relatively objective indicator tradition.- Subjective well-being/happiness tradition.- Data collection: single case, focus groups, sample surveys.- Scales and index construction.- Quality of life of the elderly.- Quality of life of children and adolescents.- Quality of life and disabilities.- Community (diverse sizes and kinds) quality of life.- Income, consumption and quality of life.- Gender and qol.- Work and the quality of life.- Marriage and family [NAME]/spirituality and quality of life.- Leisure activities and quality of life.- Health and Health-related quality of life.- Sex and the quality of life.- Travel/tourism and quality of life.- Politics, government and the quality of life.- Art (painting, sculpture, drama, literature, architecture) and quality of life.- Environmental quality and the quality of life.- Urban development, planning and the quality of life.- Sustainable development and the quality of life. | The aim of this encyclopedia is to provide a comprehensive reference work on scientific and other scholarly research on the quality of life, including health-related quality of life research or also called patient-reported outcomes research.Since the 1960s two over-lapping but fairly distinct research communities and traditions have developed concerning ideas about the quality of life, individually and collectively, one with a fairly narrow focus on health-related issues and one with a quite broad focus. In many ways, the central issues of these fields have roots extending to the observations and speculations of ancient philosophers, creating a continuous exploration by diverse explorers in diverse historic and cultural circumstances over several centuries of the qualities of human existence. What we have not had so far is a single, multidimensional reference work connecting the most salient and important contributions to the relevant fields.Entries are organized alphabetically and cover basic concepts, relatively well-established facts, lawlike and causal relations, theories, methods, standardized tests, biographic entries on significant figures, organizational profiles, indicators and indexes of qualities of individuals and of communities of diverse sizes, including rural areas, towns, cities, counties, provinces, states, regions, countries and groups of countries. | <p>The first comprehensive reference work on scientific and other scholarly research on the quality of life and well-being</p><p>Covers the subject of quality-of-life from a multi disciplinary perspective</p><p>Includes the behavioral and social sciences as well as health and healthcare</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-0752-8 | Social Sciences | Michalos | [NAME], University of Northern British Columbia, Prince George, BC, Canada | Encyclopedia of Quality of Life and Well-Being Research |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 9116 | Hard cover | Book | 9116 p. In 11 volumes, not available separately. | 1 | final | 4750 | Social Sciences | Quality of Life Research | SCX23000 | JFF | Positive Psychology | SCY44000 | [NAME] | Social Sciences | Encyclop(a)edia | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-01-01 00:00:00 |  | worldwide | [NAME]/religious views of the good life.- Social indicators/social reporting in the relatively objective indicator tradition.- Subjective well-being/happiness tradition.- Data collection: single case, focus groups, sample surveys.- Scales and index construction.- Quality of life of the elderly.- Quality of life of children and adolescents.- Quality of life and disabilities.- Community (diverse sizes and kinds) quality of life.- Income, consumption and quality of life.- Gender and qol.- Work and the quality of life.- Marriage and family [NAME]/spirituality and quality of life.- Leisure activities and quality of life.- Health and Health-related quality of life.- Sex and the quality of life.- Travel/tourism and quality of life.- Politics, government and the quality of life.- Art (painting, sculpture, drama, literature, architecture) and quality of life.- Environmental quality and the quality of life.- Urban development, planning and the quality of life.- Sustainable development and the quality of life. | The aim of this encyclopedia is to provide a comprehensive reference work on scientific and other scholarly research on the quality of life, including health-related quality of life research or also called patient-reported outcomes research.Since the 1960s two over-lapping but fairly distinct research communities and traditions have developed concerning ideas about the quality of life, individually and collectively, one with a fairly narrow focus on health-related issues and one with a quite broad focus. In many ways, the central issues of these fields have roots extending to the observations and speculations of ancient philosophers, creating a continuous exploration by diverse explorers in diverse historic and cultural circumstances over several centuries of the qualities of human existence. What we have not had so far is a single, multidimensional reference work connecting the most salient and important contributions to the relevant fields.Entries are organized alphabetically and cover basic concepts, relatively well-established facts, lawlike and causal relations, theories, methods, standardized tests, biographic entries on significant figures, organizational profiles, indicators and indexes of qualities of individuals and of communities of diverse sizes, including rural areas, towns, cities, counties, provinces, states, regions, countries and groups of countries. | <p>The first comprehensive reference work on scientific and other scholarly research on the quality of life and well-being</p><p>Covers the subject of quality-of-life from a multi disciplinary perspective</p><p>Includes the behavioral and social sciences as well as health and healthcare</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-0754-2 | Social Sciences | Michalos | [NAME], University of Northern British Columbia, Prince George, BC, Canada | Encyclopedia of Quality of Life and Well-Being Research |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 9116 | Hard cover | Book + Online Access | 9116 p. Print + eReference. In 11 volumes, not available separately. | 1 | final | 5900 | Social Sciences | Quality of Life Research | SCX23000 | JFF | Positive Psychology | SCY44000 | [NAME] | Social Sciences | Encyclop(a)edia | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-01-02 00:00:00 |  |  | [NAME]/religious views of the good life.- Social indicators/social reporting in the relatively objective indicator tradition.- Subjective well-being/happiness tradition.- Data collection: single case, focus groups, sample surveys.- Scales and index construction.- Quality of life of the elderly.- Quality of life of children and adolescents.- Quality of life and disabilities.- Community (diverse sizes and kinds) quality of life.- Income, consumption and quality of life.- Gender and qol.- Work and the quality of life.- Marriage and family [NAME]/spirituality and quality of life.- Leisure activities and quality of life.- Health and Health-related quality of life.- Sex and the quality of life.- Travel/tourism and quality of life.- Politics, government and the quality of life.- Art (painting, sculpture, drama, literature, architecture) and quality of life.- Environmental quality and the quality of life.- Urban development, planning and the quality of life.- Sustainable development and the quality of life. | The aim of this encyclopedia is to provide a comprehensive reference work on scientific and other scholarly research on the quality of life, including health-related quality of life research or also called patient-reported outcomes research.Since the 1960s two over-lapping but fairly distinct research communities and traditions have developed concerning ideas about the quality of life, individually and collectively, one with a fairly narrow focus on health-related issues and one with a quite broad focus. In many ways, the central issues of these fields have roots extending to the observations and speculations of ancient philosophers, creating a continuous exploration by diverse explorers in diverse historic and cultural circumstances over several centuries of the qualities of human existence. What we have not had so far is a single, multidimensional reference work connecting the most salient and important contributions to the relevant fields.Entries are organized alphabetically and cover basic concepts, relatively well-established facts, lawlike and causal relations, theories, methods, standardized tests, biographic entries on significant figures, organizational profiles, indicators and indexes of qualities of individuals and of communities of diverse sizes, including rural areas, towns, cities, counties, provinces, states, regions, countries and groups of countries. | <p>The first comprehensive reference work on scientific and other scholarly research on the quality of life and well-being</p><p>Covers the subject of quality-of-life from a multi disciplinary perspective</p><p>Includes the behavioral and social sciences as well as health and healthcare</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4899-8019-9 | Social Sciences | Murphy | [NAME], University of Miami, Coral Gables, FL, USA | Community-Based Interventions | Philosophy and Action | International Perspectives on Social Policy, Administration, and Practice |  | 1 | 2014 | 284 | Hard cover | Book | I, 284 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Social Sciences | Social Work | SCX21000 | JKSN | Community and Environmental Psychology | SCY20070 | JMH | Social Sciences / Social Work | Monograph | Springer New York | In production | 2014-01-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Philosophy and Community-based Interventions.- The Dimensions of a Community.- Community-based Organizations.- A New Epidemiology.- Research and Community.- The Conceptual Flow of a Community-based Project.- Leadership from Below.- Social Interventions and Justice.- Conclusion. | For decades, community-centered social services have been promoted as an admirable ideal. Yet the concept of decentralized services delivered where people live has proved to be an elusive ideal as well, with the promise of empowerment often giving way to disinterest and apathy.Community-Based Interventions examines the reasons community programs tend to founder and proposes a realistic framework for sustained success. The book's theoretical, philosophical and political foundations begin with the importance of context, as in local knowledge and community self-definition and engagement. Innovative, often startling, approaches to planning, design and implementation begin with the recognition that communities are not 'targets' or 'locations' to be 'fixed,' but social realities whose issues require concrete answers. The variety of examples described in these chapters demonstrate the power of community interventions in providing effective services, reducing inequities and giving individuals greater control over their health, their environment and in the long run, their lives. Included in the coverage:Redefining community: the social dimensions.A new epidemiology to inform community work.The role of research in designing community interventions.The conceptual flow of a community-based project.Building autonomy through leadership from below.Relating social interventions to social justice.Attuned to the current era of health and mental health reform, Community-Based Interventions represents a major step forward in its field and makes an inspiring text for social workers, clinical social workers, public health administrators and community activists. | <p>The practice of community-based projects is tied to this theoretical justification throughout </p><p>New community-based methods provided </p><p>Emphasis is placed on social activism and justice issues</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-81-322-1697-1 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], The  English and Foreign Languages University, Hyderabad, India | Cultures of Memory in South Asia | Orality, Literacy and the Problem of Inheritance | Sophia Studies in  Cross-cultural Philosophy of Traditions and [NAME] | 16 | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 330 p. | 0 | approx. | 179 | Social Sciences | Cultural Studies | SCX22040 | JFC | Non-Western Philosophy | SCE21000 | HPD | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer India | Planned | 2014-01-22 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction: What Do You Do With What You Have?.- Signatures of Memory.- Configurations of Memory.- Derrida Elsewhere: A Mnemocultural Dispersal.- Embodiments of Reflection.- Learning in the Double Bind: Literary Inquiries and Cultural Referents.- The Literary Labyrinth: Mnemotexts and Action Knowledges.- The Literary Labyrinth: Fables of Identity.- Tanūnapāt: [NAME], [NAME] and the Vestiges of Trace.- Mnemotexts of Response.- Untimely Readings: Temporality, [NAME] and the Mode of Being in the Mahabharata.- Textlooms of Mnemoculture: Memory, History and the Archives of Betrayal.- Responsive Receptions: The Question of Translation Beyond the Accursed Zone.- Close Ups: Towards Critical Humanities. | Culture of Memory in South Asia reconfigures European representations of India as a paradigmatic extension of a classical reading, which posits the relation between text and context in a determined way. It explores the South Asian cultural response to European “textual” inheritances. The main argument of this work is that the reflective and generative nodes of Indian cultural formations are located in the configurations of memory, the body and idiom (verbal and visual), where the body or the body complex becomes the performative effect and medium of articulated memories. This work advances its arguments by engaging with mnemocultures---cultures of memory---that survive and proliferate in speech and gesture. Drawing on Sanskrit and Telugu reflective sources, this work emphasizes the need to engage with cultural memory and the compositional modes of Indian reflective traditions. This important and original work focuses on the ruptured and stigmatised resources of heterogeneous Indian traditions and calls for critical humanities that move beyond the colonially configured received traditions. Cultures of Memory suggests the possibilities of transcultural critical humanities research and teaching initiatives from the Indian context in today’s academy. | <p>First comprehensive work on cultural memory in South Asia</p><p>Affirms the need for critical humanities that would reorient teaching and research in South Asia</p><p>Advances epistemic comparisons and contrasts between Indian and Europe    </p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-81-322-1764-0 | Social Sciences | Sengupta | [NAME], [NAME] Abul Kalam Azad Institute of Asian Studies, Kolkata, India | Myth and Rhetoric of the Turkish Model | Exploring Developmental Alternatives |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 200 p. 1 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Social Sciences | International Relations | SCX18040 | JPS | European Integration | SCW12073 | KCS | Social Sciences / Political Science | Monograph | Springer India | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Chapter 1. Political Dynamics in Eurasia: [NAME] and Context of the Turkish Model.- Chapter 2. What is the “Turkish Model”?.- Chapter 3. Confronting the Past: Reclaiming Ottoman-Russian connections and the Ottoman legacy.- Chapter 4. Eurasianism or [NAME]? The Neighborhood in Turkish Foreign Policy.- Chapter 5. The Central Asian Response to Models.- Chapter 6. The Turkish Model at Crossroads: A Conclusion.- Bibliography. | The volume discusses what the Turkish Model, or Turkish Development Alternative, was and why it was promoted in the Central Asian republics immediately following the dissolution of the Soviet Union. The Turkish Model proposed a ‘secular, democratic, liberal society’ for the post-Soviet Turkic world and in the process encouraged a ‘Turkic’ rhetoric that emphasized the connection between two regions based on common ancestry. The volume begins with an understanding of the reality of the model from a Turkish perspective and then goes on to examine whether the Turkish world as a ‘cultural-civilizational alternative’ makes sense both from a historical as well as contemporary lens. It concludes by looking at the reemergence of the model in the wake of the events in West Asia in early 2011. While Turkey defines its Turkic world as the Balkans, parts of the Caucasus, the Central Asian states, the region of the [NAME] in Russia and northern Afghanistan, this volume examines only that part of the Turkic world where the ‘Turkic Model’ was presented as the model of development in the post-disintegration period, i.e., Central Asia. This is also done with the recognition that in the regions where the Ottomans had once wielded control, the volatile nature of both subnational and ultranational agendas complicates the formulation of any single model. | <p>First volume to look at the ‘myth’ of the Turkish Model from a Eurasian and post-Arab Spring perspective</p><p>Critically looks at various understandings of the Turkish Model</p><p>Looks at the broader question of how far ‘models’ work for regions in transition</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7922-8 | Social Sciences | Simich | [NAME], Vera Institute of Justice, New York, NY, USA; [NAME], University of Toronto Mount Sinai Hospital, Toronto, ON, Canada | Refuge and Resilience | [NAME] and Mental Health among Resettled Refugees and Forced Migrants | International Perspectives on Migration | 7 | 1 | 2014 | 190 | Hard cover | Book | X, 190 p. 1 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Social Sciences | Migration | [NAME] | [NAME] | Psychiatry | SCH53003 | MMH | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Preafce: Laurence Kirmayer.- 1: Editor’s Introduction: [NAME] Simich.- 2: What is resilience and how does it relate to the refugee experience?  Historical and theoretical perspectives: Wade E. Pickren.- 3: Social determinants of refugee mental health: [NAME]: The debate about trauma and psychosocial treatment for refugees: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Payne.- 5: Reflections on using a cultural psychiatry approach to assessing and fortifying refugee resilience in Canada: [NAME] Andermann.- 6: Personal and social forms of resilience:  Research with Southeast Asian and [NAME] refugees in Canada: [NAME] Beiser.- 7: Social support in refugee resettlement: [NAME] Stewart.- 8: Newcomer youth self-esteem: A community-based mixed methods study of Afghan, Columbian, Sudanese and [NAME] youth in Toronto, Canada: Nazilla Khanlou, [NAME], [NAME], Emma Oudeh.- 9: Newcomer refugee youth as ‘resettlement champions’ for their families: Vulnerability, resilience and empowerment: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], Rabea Murtaza, [NAME], Nahom Berhane and Jessica Forster.- 10: A social entrepreneurship framework for mental health equity: The program model of the Canadian Centre for Victims of Torture: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Abai.- 11: The role of settlement agencies in promoting refugee resilience: Biljana Vasilevska.- 12: Mental healthcare policy for refugees In Canada:[NAME] and [NAME] Tuck.- 13: Supporting human trafficking survivor resiliency through comprehensive case management: [NAME] Pesso.- 14: Migrant mental health, law and detention: Impacts and alternatives: [NAME]. | Taking an interdisciplinary approach and focusing on the social and psychological resources that promote resilience among forced migrants, this book presents theory and evidence about what keeps refugees healthy during resettlement. The book draws on contributions from cultural psychiatry, anthropology, ethics, nursing, psychiatric epidemiology, sociology and social work.Concern about immigrant mental health and social integration in resettlement countries has given rise to public debates that challenge scientists and policy makers to assemble facts and solutions to perceived problems. Since the 1980s, refugee mental health research has been productive but arguably overly-focused on mental disorders and problems rather than solutions. Social science perspectives are not well integrated with medical science and treatment, which is at odds with social reality and underlies inadequacy and fragmentation in policy and service delivery. Research and practice that contribute to positive refugee mental health from Canada and the U.S. show that refugee mental health promotion must take into account social and policy contexts of immigration and health care in addition to medical issues. Despite traumatic experiences, most refugees are not mentally ill in a clinical sense and those who do need medical attention often do not receive appropriate care. As recent studies show, social and cultural determinants of health may play a larger role in refugee health and adaptation outcomes than do biological factors or pre-migration experiences. This book’s goal therefore is to broaden the refugee mental health field with social and cultural perspectives on resilience and mental health. | <p>An innovative focus on resilience</p><p>Focuses on solutions in mental health care</p><p>Presents evidence using a range of research methods</p><p>Timely and relevant to international and national immigration and health policy</p><p>Useful in teaching students and practitioners but not only for academic audiences</p><p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8593-8 | Social Sciences | Vakalahi | [NAME], Morgan State University, Baltimore, MD, USA; [NAME], University of Alabama, Tuscaloosa, AL, USA; [NAME], The City University of New York, New York, NY, USA | The Collective Spirit of Aging Across Cultures |  | International Perspectives on Aging | 9 | 1 | 2014 | 210 | Hard cover | Book | X, 210 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Social Sciences | Aging | SCX11000 | JFSP31 | Geriatrics/Gerontology | SCH2500X | MJX | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-03-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword: Chandra Mehrotra.- Chapter 1: 4th Generational Theories of Intersection: Multicultural Aging:Gaynell M. Simpson, [NAME] Giunta.- Chapter 2: A Historical Perspective in Aging and Gerontology: [NAME] 3: The Fourth Hill of Life: American Indian/Alaska Native Elders:Priscilla A Day.- Chapter 4: Aging and Mistreatment: Victimization of Older Adults in the United States: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Kettaneh.- Chapter 5: Latin@ Elders: Securing Healthy Aging Inspite of Health and Mental Health Disparities: [NAME], [NAME] Chapter 6: Aging, Intimacy, and Sex: [NAME], [NAME] 7: The Effects of Minority and Immigration Status on Elderly Health: A Community Social Capital Perspective: [NAME], [NAME] 8: A Profile of Rural African American [NAME]: Meeting Their Needs: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Espinosa.- Chapter 9: Intergenerational Dynamics Related to Aging and Eldercare in Asian American Families: Promoting Access to Services: [NAME], [NAME] Robinson.- Chapter 10: Seeing the Social in Technology for Older Adults: Making the implicit explicit through a multidisciplinary lens: [NAME] 11: Health Promotion for African American Elders: Church is the likely Place: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Martin.- Chapter 12: City Life, Our Way of Life: Aging in the Urban Environment: [NAME],[NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Vakalahi.- Chapter 13: A Call to Action: Dementia Screening of Alzheimer’s disease in Older African Americans: [NAME] and Gaynell M. Simpson.- Chapter 14: Reworking the Template: The Financial Crisis and Housing Transitions of Older Americans: [NAME] 15: Understanding the Human-Animal Bond: Implications for Practice with Community-Living Older Adults: [NAME], Regina Brotherton.- Chapter 16: Summary and Future Directions: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME]. | The collective, inclusive, and intersectional framework used in this book speaks to the significance of understanding aging across diverse cultures from multiple perspectives, but still as a shared human experience. The underlying message of the book is that although we are unique and different in our aging processes, we are ultimately connected through this physical, mental and spiritual experience of aging. Thus, regardless of whether we are service providers, service recipients, educators or merely fellow human beings, it is important that we approach the aging experience through a collective lens for discovering and sharing resources as we age; honoring the past while simultaneously accepting that the future is here. A few select examples of key findings from this collaborative work are as follows. First, despite progress in the field, certain issues remain to be addressed including the challenges of racism and sexism, mistreatment, the digital divide, poverty, and other social and economic crises in urban and rural communities as they relate to our aging population. Second, the need for sustaining a sense of independence among the aged and interdependence among supportive systems is warranted. Third, our elders continue to benefit from culturally competent services community-based health interventions and social services that addresses normative and emerging challenges for them. Fourth, spirituality in both indigenous and contemporary perspectives remains important for our elders’ development and quality of life. | <p>Speaks to the importance of understanding aging across diverse cultures from multiple perspectives and trans-disciplines</p><p>Uses theories, stories and best practices in showing the uniqueness of cultural groups while emphasizing the importance of sharing resources as we age</p><p>Responds to clinical, research, teaching, and policy needs of aging populations</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8013-1 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], Ghent University, Ghent, Belgium; [NAME], University of Oklahoma, Tulsa, OK, USA; [NAME], Ghent University, Ghent, Belgium | Trust and School Life | The Role of Trust for Learning, Teaching, Leading, and Bridging |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 550 | Hard cover | Book | IV, 550 p. | 0 | final | 129 | Social Sciences | Sociology, general | SCX22000 | JHB | Educational Psychology | SCO39000 | JNC | Social Sciences / Sociology | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1: Introduction.- PART I: TRUST AND [NAME] Trust in Elementary and Secondary Urban Schools: A Pathway for Student Success and College Ambition; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] 3: The Interconnectivity of Trust in Schools; [NAME] Chapter 4: Organizational Predictability, the School Principal and Achievement; [NAME] and [NAME] 5: Teacher Trust in the Principal: Factor Structure and Effects; [NAME] and [NAME] Mitchell.- PART II: TRUST AND TEACHING.- Chapter 6: The Effects of Standards Based School Accountability on Teacher [NAME] and Trust Relationships: A Longitudinal Analysis; [NAME] and [NAME] 7: Trust at Ground Zero: Trust and Collaboration within the Professional Learning Community; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Smith.- Chapter 8: Teacher Trust in Students and the Organizational School Context: The Role of Student Culture and Teachability Perceptions; [NAME] and [NAME] 9: Mentoring, Trust and Teacher [NAME]: A Powerful Force for New Teacher Induction; [NAME] and [NAME] AND LEADING.- Chapter 10: Linking Social Networks and Trust at Multiple Levels: Examining Dutch Elementary Schools; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Chapter 11: Trust, Control and Comprehensive School Reform: Investigating Growth in Teacher-Teacher Relational Trust in Success for All Schools; [NAME] Chapter 12: Principal Influence and Faculty Trust: An Analysis of Teacher Perceptions in Middle Schools; [NAME] and [NAME]. PART IV: TRUST AND BRIDGING.- Chapter 13: The Principal Connection: Trust and Innovative Climate in a Network of Reform; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] 14: Trust in Districts: The Role of Relationships in Policymaking for School Improvement; [NAME] and Matthew Clifford.- Chapter 15: Teachers’ Trust in Knowledge Sources for Continuing Professional Development: Investigating Trust and Trustworthiness in School Systems; [NAME]. | This book samples recent and emerging trust research in education including an array of conceptual approaches, measurement innovations, and explored determinants and outcomes of trust. The collection of pathways explores the phenomenon of trust and establishes the significance of trust relationships in school life. It emboldens the claim that trust merits continued attention of both scholars and practitioners because of the role it plays in the production of equity and excellence. Divided into four parts, the book explores trust under the rubrics of learning, teaching, leading and bridging.The book proposes a variety of directions for future research. These include the simultaneous investigation of trust from the prospectives of various  trusters, and at both the individual and group levels, longitudinal research designs, and an elaboration of methods. | <p>This book represents emerging research from a new generation as well as seasoned trust scholars</p><p>This book offers a unique and current update of trust research in education</p><p>This book presents a variety of directions for future research</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | [PHONE]-04-0 | Social Sciences | Wiryomartono | Bagoes Wiryomartono | Perspectives on Traditional Settlements and Communities | Home, Form and Culture in Indonesia |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 160 p. 44 illus. | 0 | final | 129 | Social Sciences | Anthropology | SCX12000 | JHM | Archaeology | SCX13000 | HD | Social Sciences / Anthropology | Monograph | Springer Singapore | In production | 2014-03-28 00:00:00 |  |  | ​About the book.- Part I : Dwelling Tradition and Culture.- Chapter 1 : The Setting, Boundary and Origin.- Chapter 2 : House and Neighbourhood.- Chapter 3 : Organization of Settlement.- Part II :Community and Vernacular Settlement.- Chapter 4 : The Rituals of the Smoke.- Chapter 5 : Dwelling as Dharma.- Chapter 6 : Of Naga Community.- Chapter 7 : [NAME] Mamak.- Chapter 8 : Home, Village, and the Life-World.- Chapter 9 : Building and Dwelling at the Confluence.- Epilogue. | This book covers the relationship between societies and their culture in the context of traditional settlement in Indonesia. The focus of the study is on the search for meanings of local concepts. This study reveals and analyzes the concepts concerning home and their sociocultural strategies for maintaining a sense of community and identity. In this study, identifying local concepts becomes the hallmark and the hub of analyses that explore, verify and establish relations between ideas and phenomena. Based on these relations, this study attempts to capture the reality of the local world that upholds and sustains the communities’ values, norms and principles for what they may call a homeland. The book is organized into two parts. Part I describes a cross-regional habitation in Indonesia, while Part II presents four ethnic regions of Indonesia - Sa’dan Toraja, Bali, [NAME] and [NAME]. Their unique traditions, customs, beliefs and attitudes serve to provide diversity in terms of their backgrounds and lifestyles, though they share the challenge of sustaining their sense of home in the face of modernity as characterized by changes and developments toward a technologically industrialized society. The central research questions are - What is development in terms of culture and environmental sustainability? How do these communities respond to modernity? | <p>Provides interdisciplinary discussions and analyses on vernacular settlements, culture and society in Indonesia</p><p>Describes the relationship between people and their built environments in terms of culture, custom and tradition</p><p>Explores, reveals and analyzes the local concepts and practices of habitation that are essential to a sense of home in the sociocultural context</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02233-8 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], South Asia Institute, Heidelberg, Germany; Paulo Casaca, South Asia Democratic Forum (SADF), Brussels, Belgium; [NAME], South Asia Democratic Forum (SADF), Brussels, Belgium; [NAME], South Asia Democratic Forum (SADF), Brussels, Belgium | The Merits of Regional Cooperation | The Case of South Asia |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 220 p. 13 illus., 2 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129 | Social Sciences | International Relations | SCX18040 | JPS | Regional/Spatial Science | SCW12189 | KCP | Social Sciences / Political Science | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  | worldwide | Part I: Peace and Stability.- Part II: Economic co-operation.- Part III: Efficient Use of Resources.- Part IV: EU-South Asia relations. | This book highlights various cutting-edge topics and approaches to cooperation and regional integration in South Asia. Contributions from both South Asian and EU scholars carry the distinctive flavour of differing perspectives, in order to identify possible driving factors for regional cooperation.The book is divided into four parts:Peace and Stability focuses on how to combat terrorism and ideologies of hate, looks at governance in the context of cultural diversity, and examines the role of education in achieving traditional and human security;Economic Cooperation deals with potential EU-India trade relations as well as the issue of how to transform the South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC) into an effective and coherent economic space;Efficient Use of Resources analyses how the region can achieve more development;EU-South Asia relations elaborates on potential areas of cooperation between the two regions. | <p>Introduces the central themes that have preoccupied the field of regionalization in South Asia over the last few decades</p><p>Identifies new, emerging areas of research</p><p>Brings together interdisciplinary area specialists and practitioners</p> | Science | Professional Books (2) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law